Manualslib.

com - Simplified Manuals

Manuals / Brands / Mitutoyo Manuals / Measuring Instruments / SJ-210 / User manual / PDF

MITUTOYO SJ-210 USER MANUAL

Quick Links
Calibration
Table of Contents
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Precautions for Use
Warranty
Export Control Compliance
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment
Table of Contents
OVERVIEW
Outline of the SJ-210
Standard SJ-210 Configuration
Name of Each Part on the SJ-210
OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210
Functions of Operation Keys
Home Screen
Screen Hierarchy in the Display
Displaying the Guide Screen
Entering Numeric Values/Characters
List of Icons
Screen Settings
SETTING UP THE SJ-210
Settings
Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit
Attaching and detaching the detector
Attaching and detaching the drive/detector unit
Plugging in and unplugging the display unit cable
Using the connection cable
Attaching the Display Protection Sheet
Power Supply
Recharging the built-in battery
Turning on the power supply
Setting the auto-sleep function when using the built-in battery
Initial Settings
Carrying Case
MEASUREMENT OPERATION
Overall Measurement Flow
Calibration
Measurement
Setting the workpiece and SJ-210
Starting measurement
Measurement Result Management
Loading/Saving/Deleting/Renaming measurement results
Outputting the measurement results
MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY
Switching the Measurement Result Display with the [PAGE] Key
Switching the parameter display
Evaluation profile display
Graph display
Condition list display
GO/NG judgment result display
Trace display
Sampling Length Result Display
CALIBRATION
Calibration Preparation
Calibration preparation (standard type, retracting type)
Calibration preparation (transverse tracing type)
Calibration Condition Setup Screens Guide
Calibrating the SJ-210
Setting the Nominal Value of the Precision Roughness Specimen
Setting Calibration Conditions
Setting the number of measurements
Modifying the roughness standard
Modifying profile filters
Modifying the cutoff length (λc)
Modifying the number of sampling lengths (N)
Setting the evaluation length to an arbitrary length
Modifying the traversing speed
Modifying the measuring range
Checking the Calibration History
Setting the Stylus Alarm
MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS
Measurement Condition Screens Guide
Modifying the Roughness Standard
Modifying the Evaluation Profile
Modifying Display Parameters
Modifying Profile Filters
Modifying Items Related to Cut-off
Modifying the Number of Sampling Lengths
Setting the Evaluation Length to an Arbitrary Length
Setting Pre-travel/Post-travel
Modifying the Traversing Speed
Modifying the Measuring Range
Reprocessing Calculation Results
Saving/Loading/Deleting/Renaming Measurement Conditions
Measurement condition management screens guide
Saving measurement conditions
Loading measurement conditions
Deleting measurement conditions
Renaming saved measurement conditions
MODIFYING PARAMETERS
Parameter Modification Screens Guide
Selecting the Displayed Parameters (Parameter Customization)
Customizing parameters
Setting the GO/NG Judgment Function
Parameter Detail Settings
Setting calculation conditions when Sm, Pc, Ppi, or Rc is selected
Setting calculation conditions when HSC is selected
Setting calculation conditions when mr is selected
Setting calculation conditions when mr[c] (tp for ANSI) is selected
Setting calculation conditions when δc (Htp for ANSI) is selected
Setting calculation conditions when a profile motif (R-Motif) is
selected
MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/ DELETE/RENAME)
Data To Be Saved and Storage Media
Handling the memory card
Memory card folder construction
Data saved on the memory card
Measurement Results Screen Guide
File Management
Modifying folder names
Specifying the main folder
Loading Measurement Results
Loading the saved measurement results
Searching for files to load
Saving Measurement Results
Saving the measurement results newly
Overwriting the measurement results
Deleting Measurement Results
Renaming Measurement Results
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP
Operating Environment Setup Screen Guide
Setting the Date and Time
Data Output Settings
Setting the data output to SPC
Setting the data output to a printer
Setting the print items
Setting the print magnification
Setting the printer
Setting data output to save data
Setting the data output to hard copy
Setting the Language Display
Calibrating Drive Unit Speed and Settings
Switching the Measurement Units
Setting the Decimal Point
Adjust the Volume of Indicator Sounds
Restricting Operation Functions (Customization)
Memory Card Formatting and File Management
Formatting the memory card
Checking the save status of the memory card
Saving text data to the memory card
Setting the Save 10 function
Backing up the memory card and restoring backup data
Setting the Auto-sleep Function
Setting the Self-timer
Setting PC Communication Conditions
Displaying the Position of the Detector
Testing the Display and Operation Keys
Restoring Factory Default Settings
Items restored to original values when restoring factory default
settings
Checking the Version
SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN
Screen Display
Switching the Calibration Results Screens Guide
Switching Calculation Results Screen
Switching Evaluation Profile Screen
Switching Graph Display Screen
Switching Measurement Conditions List Screen
Setting the Display of the Setting Conditions
Switching the Display Direction
Shortcut Key
Guidance Screen
Indicating Contact State of the Detector
Displaying Calculation Results of the Continuous Measurement
(Vertical Trace/Horizontal Trace)
Loading/Saving 10 Measurement Conditions
Saving Measurement Results Automatically
Hard Copying the Screen
Automatic Printing After Completing Measurement
Stylus Alarm
Function Restriction
Foot Switch
Self-timer
SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY
SPC Data Output
Connecting the SJ-210 and DP-1VR
Selecting parameters
Outputting SPC data
Printing to an External Printer
Connecting the SJ-210 and printer
Setting the printer communication conditions
Printing calculation results and measurement conditions
Printing operating environment settings
Saving Data to the Memory Card
Saving measurement results to the memory card
Saving screen images to the memory card
INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Daily Care
Retracting the Detector
Replacing the Built-in Battery Pack
TROUBLESHOOTING
System Operation
Measuring Operation
Calculation Results
Outputting Measurement Results
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Detector
Drive
Display Unit
Compatible roughness standard
Condition settings
Cutoff lengths/sampling lengths, number of sampling lengths, and
sampling interval
Upper limit of motif lengths/evaluation lengths, number of sampling
lengths, and sampling interval
Parameters and roughness standards/evaluation profiles
Measurement range and resolution
Traversal length
Power Supply
Temperature/Humidity Range
External Dimensions and Mass
Optional Accessories
Consumables
SPC Output Specifications
Contact Connector Specifications
Connection Specifications with a Personal Computer
RS-232C Communication Specifications
REFERENCE INFORMATION
Roughness Standard
Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1982
Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1994
Evaluating based on VDA
Evaluation based on JIS B0601-2001 and ISO
Evaluating based on ANSI
Evaluation Profiles and Filters
Evaluation profiles
Filters
Differences in filter characteristics
Amplitude characteristics of 2CR and GAUSS (Gaussian) filters
Mean Line Compensation
Traversal Length
Definitions of the SJ-210 Roughness Parameters
Ra (JIS1994, JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Arithmetic
mean of roughness, Ra (JIS1982): Arithmetic mean deviation of
roughness
Rq (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square of
roughness
Rz (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rmax (JIS1982), Ry
(JIS1994, Free): Maximum height
Rp (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rpm (ANSI): Tallest
peak
Rv (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum valley depth
Rt (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum roughness
R3z (Free): Third-level height
Rsk (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Skewness (degree of
asymmetry)
Rku (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Kurtosis
Rc (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Average height
Pc (JIS1994, Free), RPc (ANSI): Peak count
RSm (JIS1994/2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mountain and
valley mean width
S (JIS1994, Free): Mean width of local peak
HSC (Free): High-spot count
Rmax (ANSI, VDA), Rz1max (ISO1997): Maximum height
RzJIS (JIS2001, Free), Rz (JIS1982, 1994): 10-point mean
roughness
Ppi (Free): Peak count
Δa (ANSI, Free): Slope of the arithmetic mean (angle of the mean
slope)
RΔq (ISO1997, JIS2001, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square slope
(angle of the mean square slope)
lr (Free): Expansion length ratio
mr (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Material-ratio-length rate
mr[c] (ISO1997, JIS1994, 2001, VDA, Free), tp (ANSI): Material-
ratio length rate
δc (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free), Htp (ANSI): Slice-level
difference (plateau ratio)
tp (ANSI): Material-ratio length rate
Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference (plateau ratio)
Rk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Enabled-material-ratio
roughness (center height)
Rpk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Initial abrasion height (peak
height)
Rvk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley depth
Mr1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 1
(upper relative-material-ratio length)
Mr2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 2
(lower relative-material-ratio length)
A1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Peak area
A2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley area
Vo (Free): Volume measure
BAC: Material-ratio profile
ADC: Amplitude distribution curve
Motif-related Parameters
How to obtain roughness motifs
Roughness motif parameters
R (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean depth
Rx (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif maximum depth
AR (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean length
Service Network
PAULNGARDNERCOMP ANY
9104GUI
LFORDROAD,SUI
TEH [email protected]
COLUMBI
A,MD21046 USA PHONE+1-954-
946-
9454
 No. 99MBB122A
SERIES No. 178

Surface Roughness
Measuring Tester
SJ-210

User’s Manual

Read this User’s Manual thoroughly before operating the

instrument. After reading, retain it close at hand for future
reference.
 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Safety Precautions
To ensure that instruments are operated correctly and safely, Mitutoyo manuals use
various safety symbols (Signal Words and Safety Alert Symbols) to identify and warn
against hazards and potential accidents.

The following signs indicate general warnings:

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in serious
injury or death.
DANGER

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury or property damage.
CAUTION

The following signs indicate specific warnings or prohibited actions, or indicate a

mandatory action:

Alerts the user to a specific hazardous situation. The given example means “Caution,
risk of electric shock”.

Prohibits a specific action. The given example means “Do not disassemble”.

Specifies a required action. The given example means “Ground”.

No. 99MBB122A i
 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Types of Notes
The following types of notes are used in this manual to help the operator obtain reliable
measurement data through correct instrument operation.

IMPORTANT • An important note provides information essential to the completion of a task. You cannot
disregard this note to complete the task.
• An important note is a type of precaution, which if neglected could result in a loss of
data, decreased accuracy or instrument malfunction/failure.

NOTE A note emphasizes or supplements important points of the main text. It also supplies
information about specific situations (e.g., memory limitations, equipment
configurations, or details that apply to specific versions of a program).

TIP A tip is a type of note that helps the user apply the techniques and procedures described
in the text to his or her specific needs.
It also provides reference information associated with the topic being discussed.

• Mitutoyo assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect,
caused by use of this instrument not conforming to this manual.

• Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Copyright  2009 Mitutoyo Corporation. All rights reserved.

ii No. 99MBB122A
Precautions for Use
To obtain the highest performance from this instrument and to use it safely, read this
User’s Manual prior to use.

This user’s manual is intended for users of surface roughness testers SJ-210 standard
type, SJ-210 transverse tracing drive type, and SJ-210 detector retracting type.

“SJ-210” is used in almost all descriptions of this user’s manual. If using model SJ-210
detector retracting type read this manual assuming “SJ-210” as “SJ-210 detector
retracting type”. Unless otherwise noted, the manual gives common information about the
SJ-210 standard type and SJ-210 detector retracting type.

Observe the following precautions to get the most of the instrument and to attain high
accuracy for long time.

 This instrument has a sharp stylus at the edge of the detector. Take care not to be
injured.
CAUTION

IMPORTANT • For the power supply, follow the conditions described on the AC adapter supplied. Do
not use other than the AC adapter provided.

• Do not disassemble the instrument unless otherwise specified in this User’s Manual. It
will result in instrument failure or damage. The instrument has been rigorously adjusted
and assembled at the factory.
• Do not drop or give impact to the detector. The detector is a precision part.
• Do not use the instrument in an environment where it is subject to dust or vibrations.
Also keep it as far apart from noise generator such as large power supply, high-voltage
relay switch as possible.
• Avoid using the instrument where there is sudden temperature change, and operate it
where the temperature is between 10 and 30 C (RH: 85 % or less, free from dew
condensation). Do not operate/store the instrument close to a room heater or in the
direct sunlight.
• Store the instrument where the temperature can be controlled between –10 and 50 C.
• When mounting the detector to the drive unit, take care not to apply excessive force to
the drive unit.

• Before connecting/detaching the connector or connecting cable, turn the power off (by
auto sleep function).
• The stylus tip is machined precisely. Take care not to break it.
• Before measurement, wipe off oil or dust on the work piece surface to be measured.

No. 99MBB122A iii

Warranty
In the event that the Mitutoyo product, except software product, should prove defective in
workmanship or material, within one year from the date of original purchase for use, it will
be repaired or replaced, at our option, free of charge upon its prepaid return to us.

If the product fails or is damaged for any of the following reasons, it will be subject to a
repair charge, even if it is still under warranty.

1 Failure or damage owing to inappropriate handling or unauthorized modification.

2 Failure or damage owing to transport, dropping, or relocation of the instrument after

purchase.

3 Failure or damage owing to inappropriate maintenance, storage, and preservation.

4 Failure or damage owing to abnormal voltage or usage of electric power supply

(voltage, frequency) that is not specified.

5 Failure or damage owing to fire disaster, earthquake, flood disaster, thunderbolt, the
other acts of providence, environmental destruction, smoke pollution, or gas pollution
(such as sulfuretted gas).

6 Not presenting guarantee certificate.

7 The other failures or damages we can not be responsible for (such as damages owing
to the misuse of this product).

This warranty is effective only where the instrument is properly installed and operated in
conformance with the instructions in this manual.

Export Control Compliance

This Product falls into the Catch-All-Controlled Goods or Program under the Category 16
of the Separate Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order or the Category 16 of the
Separate Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, based on the Foreign Exchange
and Foreign Trade Law of Japan.

Further, this User’s Manual also falls into the Catch-All-Controlled Technology for use of
the Catch-All-Controlled Goods or Program, under the Category 16 of the Separate Table
of the Foreign Exchange Control Order.

If you intend re-exporting or re-providing the product or technology to any party other than
yourself, please consult with Mitutoyo prior to such re-exporting or re-providing.

iv No. 99MBB122A
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment
(Applicable in the European Union and other European
countries with separate collection systems)
 This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be
treated as household waste. To reduce the environmental impact of WEEE (Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment) and minimize the volume of WEEE entering
landfills, please reuse and recycle.
For further information, please contact your local dealer or distributors.

No. 99MBB122A v
Contents

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL........................................................................................................ i

Precautions for Use........................................................................................................................................ iii

Warranty........................................................................................................................................................... iv
Export Control Compliance ........................................................................................................................... iv
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union
and other European countries with separate collection systems)............................................................. v
1 SJ-210 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Outline of the SJ-210..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Standard SJ-210 Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Name of Each Part on the SJ-210 ................................................................................................ 1-8
2 OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210 ............................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Functions of Operation Keys ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Home Screen.................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 Screen Hierarchy in the Display................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Displaying the Guide Screen...................................................................................................... 2-13
2.5 Entering Numeric Values/Characters ........................................................................................ 2-15
2.6 List of Icons.................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.7 Screen Settings............................................................................................................................ 2-23
3 SETTING UP THE SJ-210...................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 SJ-210 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit ...................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Attaching and detaching the detector ................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Attaching and detaching the drive/detector unit ................................................................ 3-6
3.2.3 Plugging in and unplugging the display unit cable............................................................ 3-8
3.2.4 Using the connection cable .................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3 Attaching the Display Protection Sheet .................................................................................... 3-12
3.4 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.1 Recharging the built-in battery........................................................................................... 3-14
3.4.2 Turning on the power supply.............................................................................................. 3-17
3.4.3 Setting the auto-sleep function when using the built-in battery..................................... 3-23
3.5 Initial Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.6 Carrying Case .............................................................................................................................. 3-25
4 MEASUREMENT OPERATION.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Overall Measurement Flow ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Measurement.................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.1 Setting the workpiece and SJ-210........................................................................................ 4-4

vi No. 99MBB122A
 4.3.2 Starting measurement ........................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4 Measurement Result Management .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.1 Loading/Saving/Deleting/Renaming measurement results............................................... 4-7
4.4.2 Outputting the measurement results................................................................................... 4-7
5 MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Switching the Measurement Result Display with the [PAGE] Key ........................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Switching the parameter display.......................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Evaluation profile display ..................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Graph display......................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4 Condition list display ............................................................................................................ 5-6
5.1.5 GO/NG judgment result display ........................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.6 Trace display .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.2 Sampling Length Result Display ............................................................................................... 5-10
6 CALIBRATION........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Calibration Preparation................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Calibration preparation (standard type, retracting type) ................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Calibration preparation (transverse tracing type) .............................................................. 6-5
6.2 Calibration Condition Setup Screens Guide .............................................................................. 6-7
6.3 Calibrating the SJ-210................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.4 Setting the Nominal Value of the Precision Roughness Specimen ........................................6-11
6.5 Setting Calibration Conditions .................................................................................................. 6-13
6.5.1 Setting the number of measurements ............................................................................... 6-14
6.5.2 Modifying the roughness standard.................................................................................... 6-16
6.5.3 Modifying profile filters ....................................................................................................... 6-18
6.5.4 Modifying the cutoff length (λc) ......................................................................................... 6-20
6.5.5 Modifying the number of sampling lengths (N) ................................................................ 6-21
6.5.6 Setting the evaluation length to an arbitrary length ........................................................ 6-22
6.5.7 Modifying the traversing speed ......................................................................................... 6-24
6.5.8 Modifying the measuring range ......................................................................................... 6-25
6.6 Checking the Calibration History .............................................................................................. 6-26
6.7 Setting the Stylus Alarm ............................................................................................................. 6-27
7 MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS....................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Measurement Condition Screens Guide ..................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Modifying the Roughness Standard............................................................................................ 7-4
7.3 Modifying the Evaluation Profile ................................................................................................. 7-5
7.4 Modifying Display Parameters..................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Modifying Profile Filters ............................................................................................................... 7-8
7.6 Modifying Items Related to Cut-off............................................................................................ 7-10
7.7 Modifying the Number of Sampling Lengths............................................................................ 7-14
7.8 Setting the Evaluation Length to an Arbitrary Length............................................................. 7-16
7.9 Setting Pre-travel/Post-travel ..................................................................................................... 7-20
7.10 Modifying the Traversing Speed ................................................................................................ 7-22

No. 99MBB122A vii

 7.11 Modifying the Measuring Range ................................................................................................ 7-24
7.12 Reprocessing Calculation Results ............................................................................................ 7-25
7.13 Saving/Loading/Deleting/Renaming Measurement Conditions.............................................. 7-27
7.13.1 Measurement condition management screens guide ...................................................... 7-28
7.13.2 Saving measurement conditions........................................................................................ 7-30
7.13.3 Loading measurement conditions ..................................................................................... 7-34
7.13.4 Deleting measurement conditions ..................................................................................... 7-35
7.13.5 Renaming saved measurement conditions....................................................................... 7-37
8 MODIFYING PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Parameter Modification Screens Guide ...................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Selecting the Displayed Parameters (Parameter Customization) ............................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Customizing parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Setting the GO/NG Judgment Function ...................................................................................... 8-9
8.4 Parameter Detail Settings ........................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.1 Setting calculation conditions when Sm, Pc, Ppi, or Rc is selected .............................. 8-14
8.4.2 Setting calculation conditions when HSC is selected ..................................................... 8-18
8.4.3 Setting calculation conditions when mr is selected. ....................................................... 8-21
8.4.4 Setting calculation conditions when mr[c] (tp for ANSI) is selected.............................. 8-24
8.4.5 Setting calculation conditions when δc (Htp for ANSI) is selected ................................ 8-27
8.4.6 Setting calculation conditions when a profile motif (R-Motif) is selected ..................... 8-31
9 MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/ DELETE/RENAME) ......................................................... 9-1
9.1 Data To Be Saved and Storage Media.......................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Handling the memory card.................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Memory card folder construction......................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.3 Data saved on the memory card........................................................................................... 9-6
9.2 Measurement Results Screen Guide ........................................................................................... 9-8
9.3 File Management.......................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.1 Modifying folder names....................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.2 Specifying the main folder .................................................................................................. 9-12
9.4 Loading Measurement Results .................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.1 Loading the saved measurement results .......................................................................... 9-13
9.4.2 Searching for files to load................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5 Saving Measurement Results..................................................................................................... 9-17
9.5.1 Saving the measurement results newly............................................................................. 9-17
9.5.2 Overwriting the measurement results ............................................................................... 9-19
9.6 Deleting Measurement Results .................................................................................................. 9-20
9.7 Renaming Measurement Results ............................................................................................... 9-22
10 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 Operating Environment Setup Screen Guide ........................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Setting the Date and Time .......................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 Data Output Settings ................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 Setting the data output to SPC ........................................................................................... 10-7

viii No. 99MBB122A

 10.3.2 Setting the data output to a printer.................................................................................... 10-8
10.3.2.1 Setting the print items ............................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.2.2 Setting the print magnification ................................................................................. 10-12
10.3.2.3 Setting the printer ...................................................................................................... 10-15
10.3.3 Setting data output to save data ...................................................................................... 10-17
10.3.4 Setting the data output to hard copy ............................................................................... 10-18
10.4 Setting the Language Display.................................................................................................. 10-19
10.5 Calibrating Drive Unit Speed and Settings ............................................................................. 10-20
10.6 Switching the Measurement Units........................................................................................... 10-23
10.7 Setting the Decimal Point ......................................................................................................... 10-24
10.8 Adjust the Volume of Indicator Sounds .................................................................................. 10-25
10.9 Restricting Operation Functions (Customization) ................................................................. 10-26
10.10 Memory Card Formatting and File Management.................................................................... 10-28
10.10.1 Formatting the memory card............................................................................................ 10-28
10.10.2 Checking the save status of the memory card ............................................................... 10-29
10.10.3 Saving text data to the memory card............................................................................... 10-31
10.10.4 Setting the Save 10 function ............................................................................................ 10-33
10.10.5 Backing up the memory card and restoring backup data ............................................. 10-35
10.11 Setting the Auto-sleep Function .............................................................................................. 10-37
10.12 Setting the Self-timer ................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.13 Setting PC Communication Conditions .................................................................................. 10-41
10.14 Displaying the Position of the Detector .................................................................................. 10-44
10.15 Testing the Display and Operation Keys ................................................................................ 10-45
10.16 Restoring Factory Default Settings ......................................................................................... 10-46
10.16.1 Items restored to original values when restoring factory default settings ................. 10-47
10.17 Checking the Version................................................................................................................ 10-49
11 SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN .....................................................................11-1
11.1 Screen Display..............................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Switching the Calibration Results Screens Guide....................................................................11-4
11.3 Switching Calculation Results Screen .......................................................................................11-6
11.4 Switching Evaluation Profile Screen..........................................................................................11-8
11.5 Switching Graph Display Screen................................................................................................11-9
11.6 Switching Measurement Conditions List Screen....................................................................11-10
11.7 Setting the Display of the Setting Conditions .........................................................................11-11
11.8 Switching the Display Direction ...............................................................................................11-12
12 USEFUL FEATURES OF THE SJ-210 ................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1 Shortcut Key ................................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Guidance Screen ......................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Indicating Contact State of the Detector................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Displaying Calculation Results of the Continuous Measurement
(Vertical Trace/Horizontal Trace)................................................................................................ 12-3
12.5 Loading/Saving 10 Measurement Conditions .......................................................................... 12-4
12.6 Saving Measurement Results Automatically............................................................................ 12-5

No. 99MBB122A ix
 12.7 Hard Copying the Screen............................................................................................................ 12-5
12.8 Automatic Printing After Completing Measurement ................................................................ 12-6
12.9 Stylus Alarm ................................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.10 Function Restriction.................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.11 Foot Switch .................................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.12 Self-timer ...................................................................................................................................... 12-7
13 SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY ................................................................ 13-1
13.1 SPC Data Output.......................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.1 Connecting the SJ-210 and DP-1VR................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.2 Selecting parameters........................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.3 Outputting SPC data ............................................................................................................ 13-6
13.2 Printing to an External Printer.................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2.1 Connecting the SJ-210 and printer .................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.2 Setting the printer communication conditions ................................................................. 13-9
13.2.3 Printing calculation results and measurement conditions............................................ 13-11
13.2.4 Printing operating environment settings ........................................................................ 13-13
13.3 Saving Data to the Memory Card ............................................................................................. 13-15
13.3.1 Saving measurement results to the memory card ......................................................... 13-15
13.3.2 Saving screen images to the memory card..................................................................... 13-16
14 INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .......................................................... 14-1
15 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210 ................................................................................ 15-1
15.1 Daily Care ..................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Retracting the Detector............................................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 Replacing the Built-in Battery Pack........................................................................................... 15-5
16 TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1 System Operation ........................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.2 Measuring Operation................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.3 Calculation Results ..................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.4 Outputting Measurement Results .............................................................................................. 16-4
17 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................. 17-1
17.1 Detector ........................................................................................................................................ 17-1
17.2 Drive.............................................................................................................................................. 17-1
17.3 Display Unit .................................................................................................................................. 17-2
17.3.1 Compatible roughness standard ........................................................................................ 17-2
17.3.2 Condition settings ............................................................................................................... 17-2
17.3.3 Cutoff lengths/sampling lengths, number of sampling lengths,
and sampling interval .......................................................................................................... 17-3
17.3.4 Upper limit of motif lengths/evaluation lengths, number of sampling lengths,
and sampling interval .......................................................................................................... 17-3
17.3.5 Parameters and roughness standards/evaluation profiles ............................................. 17-4
17.3.6 Measurement range and resolution ................................................................................... 17-5

x No. 99MBB122A
 17.3.7 Traversal length ................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.4 Power Supply............................................................................................................................... 17-6
17.5 Temperature/Humidity Range .................................................................................................... 17-6
17.6 External Dimensions and Mass ................................................................................................. 17-6
17.7 Optional Accessories.................................................................................................................. 17-7
17.8 Consumables............................................................................................................................... 17-9
17.9 SPC Output Specifications....................................................................................................... 17-10
17.10 Contact Connector Specifications............................................................................................17-11
17.11 Connection Specifications with a Personal Computer ..........................................................17-11
17.12 RS-232C Communication Specifications................................................................................ 17-12
18 REFERENCE INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1 Roughness Standard .................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1.1 Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1982 ................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1994 ................................................................................ 18-2
18.1.3 Evaluating based on VDA ................................................................................................... 18-3
18.1.4 Evaluation based on JIS B0601-2001 and ISO.................................................................. 18-4
18.1.5 Evaluating based on ANSI .................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2 Evaluation Profiles and Filters................................................................................................... 18-7
18.2.1 Evaluation profiles............................................................................................................... 18-7
18.2.2 Filters .................................................................................................................................. 18-10
18.2.3 Differences in filter characteristics.................................................................................. 18-13
18.2.4 Amplitude characteristics of 2CR and GAUSS (Gaussian) filters ................................ 18-14
18.3 Mean Line Compensation......................................................................................................... 18-15
18.4 Traversal Length........................................................................................................................ 18-16
18.5 Definitions of the SJ-210 Roughness Parameters................................................................. 18-19
18.5.1 Ra (JIS1994, JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Arithmetic mean of roughness,
Ra (JIS1982): Arithmetic mean deviation of roughness ................................................ 18-19
18.5.2 Rq (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square of roughness......................... 18-19
18.5.3 Rz (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rmax (JIS1982),
Ry (JIS1994, Free): Maximum height ............................................................................... 18-20
18.5.4 Rp (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rpm (ANSI): Tallest peak ............................ 18-21
18.5.5 Rv (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum valley depth ................................ 18-21
18.5.6 Rt (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum roughness.................................... 18-21
18.5.7 R3z (Free): Third-level height ........................................................................................... 18-21
18.5.8 Rsk (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Skewness (degree of asymmetry)............ 18-22
18.5.9 Rku (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Kurtosis ...................................................... 18-23
18.5.10 Rc (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Average height ............................................. 18-24
18.5.11 Pc (JIS1994, Free), RPc (ANSI): Peak count ................................................................... 18-24
18.5.12 RSm (JIS1994/2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mountain and valley mean width ... 18-25
18.5.13 S (JIS1994, Free): Mean width of local peak ................................................................... 18-27
18.5.14 HSC (Free): High-spot count ............................................................................................ 18-28
18.5.15 Rmax (ANSI, VDA), Rz1max (ISO1997): Maximum height ............................................. 18-29
18.5.16 RzJIS (JIS2001, Free), Rz (JIS1982, 1994): 10-point mean roughness......................... 18-30

No. 99MBB122A xi
 18.5.17 Ppi (Free): Peak count ....................................................................................................... 18-30
18.5.18 Δa (ANSI, Free): Slope of the arithmetic mean (angle of the mean slope) .................. 18-30
18.5.19 RΔq (ISO1997, JIS2001, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square slope
(angle of the mean square slope)..................................................................................... 18-31
18.5.20 lr (Free): Expansion length ratio....................................................................................... 18-31
18.5.21 mr (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Material-ratio-length rate............................. 18-31
18.5.22 mr[c] (ISO1997, JIS1994, 2001, VDA, Free), tp (ANSI): Material-ratio length rate........ 18-32
18.5.23 δc (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free), Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference (plateau ratio) . 18-33
18.5.24 tp (ANSI): Material-ratio length rate ................................................................................. 18-33
18.5.25 Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference (plateau ratio) ............................................................ 18-33
18.5.26 Rk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Enabled-material-ratio roughness
(center height) .................................................................................................................... 18-34
18.5.27 Rpk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Initial abrasion height (peak height)................... 18-35
18.5.28 Rvk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley depth........................................................... 18-36
18.5.29 Mr1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 1
(upper relative-material-ratio length) ............................................................................... 18-37
18.5.30 Mr2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 2
(lower relative-material-ratio length)................................................................................ 18-38
18.5.31 A1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Peak area ................................................................. 18-39
18.5.32 A2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley area ............................................................... 18-40
18.5.33 Vo (Free): Volume measure ............................................................................................... 18-41
18.5.34 BAC: Material-ratio profile ................................................................................................ 18-42
18.5.35 ADC: Amplitude distribution curve .................................................................................. 18-43
18.6 Motif-related Parameters .......................................................................................................... 18-44
18.6.1 How to obtain roughness motifs ...................................................................................... 18-44
18.6.2 Roughness motif parameters ........................................................................................... 18-48
18.6.2.1 R (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean depth............................................. 18-48
18.6.2.2 Rx (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif maximum depth ................................... 18-48
18.6.2.3 AR (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean length ......................................... 18-48

Service Network

xii No. 99MBB122A

 1 SJ-210 OVERVIEW
This section explains the structures and the features of the SJ-210.

1.1 Outline of the SJ-210

The Surftest SJ-210 is a shop-floor type surface-roughness measuring instrument, which
traces the surfaces of various machine parts, calculates their surface roughness based on
roughness standards, and displays the results.

■ SJ-210 roughness measurement process

A pick-up (hereinafter referred to as the “stylus”) attached to the detector unit of the
SJ-210 traces the minute irregularities of the work piece surface. The vertical stylus
displacement during the trace is processed and digitally displayed on the liquid crystal
display of the SJ-210.

2.The up-and-down motion of the stylus AC adapter

tracing the work piece is converted (The instrument can also be
into electrical signals. powered by the built-in battery.)
3.The electrical signals are subject to
SJ-210
various calculation processes.

1.The detector’s stylus traces

the work piece surface
(measurement surface).

DP-1VR
㧔optional㧕

Print and analyze

measurement
4.Calculation (measurement) results and saved
Work
results are displayed data
piece Printer
㧔optional㧕
Direction of detector motion
Print measurement
results and saved
data

Work-piece surface
Stylus

Measurement with the SJ-210, Connection to related equipment

No. 99MBB122A 1-1

■ Features of the SJ-210

 Designed to be convenient to carry

The SJ-210 has a lightweight (0.5 kg) design for excellent portability. In addition, it is
made compact so that it can be held and operated in one hand. The built-in battery
makes it easy to perform roughness measurement on the shop floor or other sites
where there may be no AC power supply.

NOTE • No power is drawn from the battery while the instrument is supplied power via the AC
adapter. For more information about the built-in battery, refer to 3.4.1, “Recharging the
built-in battery”.

 Wide measurement range and various roughness parameters.

Has a maximum range of 360m (-200m to +160m), and can display various
roughness parameters about the surface's roughness.

 Auto-sleep function to save power

With auto-sleep set to ON under operation on the built-in battery, the SJ-210
automatically turns the power off (enters the auto-sleep state) when it is not in
operation for more than a certain time even when the power is on. It is possible to set
the length of time that the SJ-210 waits before entering the auto-sleep state. The
SJ-210 still retains the set measurement conditions and the measurement results in
memory even when the power is turned off.

 Color monitor with the display backlight and external output functions
When the display backlight is turned on, measurement results are displayed on the
color monitor clearly and vividly even when the SJ-210 is used in a dark place. These
measurement results can also be output externally as SPC (Statistical Process
Control) data. When connected to a personal computer, the SJ-210 can be remotely
controlled (for output or measurement commands) via the RS-232C or the USB
communication interface.

 Measurement result saving function

The SJ-210 can save measurement results in the main unit up to 10 cases of
measurements. Using a memory card (optional), the SJ-210 can save the
measurement conditions up to 500 cases and the measurement data up to 10000
cases of measurements. The SJ-210 also can load the saved data to display on the
color monitor and print the data.

 Compatible with various roughness standards

The SJ-210 outputs measurement results conforming to a variety of roughness
standards, including JIS (JIS-B-0601-2001, JIS-B-0601-1994, JIS-B-0601-1982),
VDA, ISO-1997, and ANSI.

1-2 No. 99MBB122A

 1. SJ-210 OVERVIEW

■ Features of the SJ-210 (detector retracting type)

 Detector retraction function

For the SJ-210 detector retracting type, the detector extends outwards without
contacting the measurement surface. Thereby, the detector can be set up for
measurement without the detector tip being in contact with a work piece.

NOTE • Unless otherwise noted, this manual gives common information about the SJ-210
(standard type) and SJ-210 (detector retraction type).

■ Features of the SJ-210 (transverse tracing drive type)

 Detector transverse tracing drive function

For the SJ-210 transverse tracing drive type, the detector moves horizontally. Thereby,
the detector can be set up for roughness measurement on a work piece that has
limited dimensions (e.g., crankshafts).

NOTE • Unless otherwise noted, this manual gives common information about the SJ-210
(standard type) and SJ-210 (transverse tracing drive type).

No. 99MBB122A 1-3

1.2 Standard SJ-210 Configuration
This section explains the standard configuration, the standard set, and typical uses of the
optional accessories.

■ SJ-210 standard type: Standard configuration

(set no.178-560-02: measuring force 4 mN/178-560-01: measuring force 0.75 mN)

Check that the purchased package contains all the products shown in the following figure.
Display Unit Drive/detector unit
No.178-252
Drive unit
No.178-230-2

Detector
No.178-390 (Measuring force: 4 mN)
No.178-296 (Measuring force: 0.75 mN)
Standard accessory
Carrying case Connection cable (1 m/40 in) AC adapter
No.12BAK699 No.12BAA303 No.12BAK728 Power cord set

Precision roughness
specimen (with case)
No.178-601(mm) Calibration stage
No.178-602(inch/mm) No. 12BAK700
Operation Quick reference
manual manual
No. 99MBB122A No. 99MBB123A

Display protection sheet

No.12BAK820

• Only use the supplied AC adapter for this instrument. Using the adapter with equipment
other than the SJ-210 may cause damage to the adapter or equipment.
Caution

1-4 No. 99MBB122A

 1. SJ-210 OVERVIEW

■ SJ-210 detector retracting type: Standard configuration

(set no.178-562-02: measuring force 4 mN/178-562-01: measuring force 0.75 mN)

Check that the purchased package contains all the products shown in the following figure.
Display Unit Drive/detector unit
No.178-252
Drive unit
No.178-235

Detector
No.178-390 (Measuring force: 4 mN)
No.178-296 (Measuring force: 0.75 mN)
Standard accessory
Carrying case Connection cable (1 m/40 in) AC adapter
No.12BAK699 No.12BAA303 No.12BAK728 Power cord set

Precision roughness
specimen (with case)
No.178-601(mm) Calibration stage
No.178-602(inch/mm) No. 12BAK700
Operation Quick reference
manual manual
No. 99MBB122A No. 99MBB123A

Display protection sheet

No.12BAK820

• Use the supplied AC adapter for this instrument only. Using the adapter with equipment
other than the SJ-210 may cause damage to the adapter or equipment.
Caution

NOTE • Unless otherwise noted, this manual gives common information about the SJ-210
(standard type) and SJ-210 (detector retraction type).

No. 99MBB122A 1-5

■ SJ-210 transverse tracing drive type: Standard configuration
(set no.178-564-02: measuring force 4 mN/178-564-02: measuring force 0.75 mN)

Check that the purchased package contains all the products shown in the following figure.
Display Unit Drive/detector unit
No.178-252 Drive unit
No.178-233-2
Drive unit set
No.178-234-2

Detector
No.178-386 (Measuring force: 4 mN)
No.178-387 (Measuring force: 0.75 mN)

Standard accessory
Carrying case Connection cable (1 m/40 in) AC adapter
No.12BAK699 No.12BAA303 No.12BAK728 Power cord set

Precision roughness
specimen (with case)
No.178-605(mm) V-shaped adapter
No.178-606(inch/mm) Contact adapter No. 12AAE644
Calibration stage No. 12AAE643
No. 12BAK700

Operation manual Quick reference manual

No. 99MBB122A No. 99MBB123A
Hexagonal wrench
Nominal size 2.5 Display protection sheet
Hex-socket head screw No.12BAK820
No.538615 (M3)×8 (screws×4)
Nominal size 1.5 No.390151
No.538613

• Use the supplied AC adapter for this instrument only. Using the adapter with equipment
other than the SJ-210 may cause damage to the adapter or equipment.
Caution

1-6 No. 99MBB122A

 1. SJ-210 OVERVIEW

■ SJ-210 optional accessories

Depending on the shape of the work piece, it may be necessary to use optional
accessories to set up the SJ-210. Consider the shape of the work piece when purchasing
optional accessories.

TIP • For information about optional accessories, refer to Chapter 14, “INSTALLING THE
SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES”.

No. 99MBB122A 1-7

1.3 Name of Each Part on the SJ-210
This section gives the name of each part (such as keys on the display unit).

■ Display unit and drive/detector unit

The SJ-210 consists of the display unit and drive/detector unit. The drive/detector unit is
designed to be used in both ways: attached to or detached from the display unit.
Depending on the shape of the work piece, it may be easier to perform measurement with
(or without) mounting the drive/detector unit to the display unit. Use the SJ-210 in more
suitable way.

Display Unit Drive/detector unit

Drive unit

Detector

Display unit and drive/detector unit

TIP • For information about attaching and detaching the drive/detector unit, refer to 3.2,
“Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit”.

1-8 No. 99MBB122A

 1. SJ-210 OVERVIEW

■ Names of each part on the drive/detector unit

Drive unit


Nosepiece
 mounting screws*


DetectQT

 Support feet mounting groove




 Side view




Stylus

 *: Nosepiece and support feet are optional accessories.

Drive/detector unit


■ Display unit cover

The top cover of the display unit slides to allow access to the setting modification keys
underneath.

Display Unit

Cover

Display unit cover

No. 99MBB122A 1-9

■ Name of each part on the display unit

Display

Primary operation keys

The main operations for SJ-210
are performed using the following
3 keys:
[POWER/DATA] key
[START/STOP] key
[PAGE] key
Operation keys

Setting modification keys

Display Unit

<Names of each key>

࡮[POWER/DATA] key㧔Power/Data key㧕
࡮[START/STOP] key㧔Start/Stop key㧕
࡮[PAGE] key㧔Page key㧕
࡮[Blue] key㧔Blue key㧕
࡮[Red] key㧔Red key㧕
࡮[  ], [  ], [  ], [  ] key㧔Cursor key㧕
࡮[Esc/Guide] key㧔Escape/Guide key㧕
࡮[Enter/Menu] key㧔Enter/Menu key㧕

1-10 No. 99MBB122A

 1. SJ-210 OVERVIEW

■ Names of the connectors on the display unit

Rear of the display unit View with rear cover of display unit removed

Foot switch RS-232C connector SPC connector

connector

Connector cap Rear cover AC adapter  Built-in battery Memory Card USB
connector on/off switch card slot connector

When the drive/detector unit connection

plug is being placed in the storage
position, neatly fit the cable in the groove
Bottom of the display unit of the display unit.

Drive/detector unit
connection plug

Drive/detector unit retaining plate Drive/detector unit retaining pin

Rear and bottom of the display unit

No. 99MBB122A 1-11

MEMO

1-12 No. 99MBB122A

 2 OPERATION KEYS AND
DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

The SJ-210 is operated with the operation keys on the display unit. This chapter explains
the basic functions of the operation keys, the screens, and icons shown on the display.

2.1 Functions of Operation Keys

The primary operations of the SJ-210 (start measurement, measurement condition loading,
data output, etc.) are performed with the operation keys. Each operation key function is
explained here.

■ Operation keys on the display unit

Operation keys

Position of Operation keys

No. 99MBB122A 2-1

 ■ Functions of operation keys

 [POWER/DATA] key
Used to turn the power of the SJ-210 on.
Used to output data when DP-1VR or a printer is connected to the SJ-210.
It is also used to store the displayed contents on the monitor in the memory card i the
BMP file format.

 [START/STOP] key
Used to start or stop measurements.

 [PAGE] key
Used to display measurement results for the other parameters, evaluation profiles,
graphs, lists of conditions.

 [Blue] key
Used to return to the Home screen, delete numeric values, or execute functions
displayed on the monitor.

 [Red] key
Used to display the sub menu, switch the available character type for entering, or
executes functions displayed on the monitor.

 Cursor key ([ ↑ ], [ ↓ ], [ ← ], [ → ]㧕
Used to select desired items, switch the page, enter numeric values/characters.

 [Esc/Guide] key
Used to return to the previous screen. This key also functions to turn the power of the
SJ-210 off.

 [Enter/Menu] key
Used to make the setup items take effects.

2-2 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

2.2 Home Screen

When the power to the SJ-210 is turned on, the Home screen appears on the display of
the display unit.
This section explains the items and icons displayed on the Home screen.

■ Display on the Home screen

● Vertical display
External output
Date functions Existence of memory cards

Battery remainder
Roughness standard Traversal speed

Cutoff Number of sampling lengths

Related items

Parameter

● Horizontal display
Traversal Cutoff
Roughness standard speed Related items Number of sampling lengths

Parameter

NOTE • The items of “Date” and “Battery remainder” on the top of the screen are displayed on
every screen.

TIP • For information about switching the display directions, refer to 11.3, “Switching
Calculation Results Screen”.

No. 99MBB122A 2-3

 ■ Measurable indicator

When the detector is attached to the drive/detector unit, it is possible to check whether or
not the detector is in the measurable position on the Home screen.

When the detector is in the measurable position, the item “Date” on the top of the screen
turns blue.

This part is blue.

Home screen (when the detector is within the measurable range)

When the detector is not in the measurable position, the item “Date” on the top of the
screen turns red.

This part is red.

Home screen㧔when the detector is out of the measurable range㧕

2-4 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

■ Displaying the remaining battery power

The icon for displaying the remaining battery power appears on the display of the display
unit. While the battery is being charged, an icon indicating that charging is taking place is
displayed.

During the AC adapter powered operation, the battery is automatically charged according
to the power consumption.

The icon for displaying the

remaining battery power

The power is off after

this icon flashes 10
seconds.

Indication of remaining voltage

100 to 80% 80 to 60% 60 to 40% 40 to 20% 20 to 0%

Indication condition The display when the

of charge built-in battery switch is
OFF.

Charging in
progress

IMPORTANT • Observe the following when the SJ-210 is not powered with the AC adapter.
• When the remaining battery power falls between 20% and 40%, connect the AC
adapter as soon as possible.
• When the remaining battery power approaches 0%, connect the AC adapter
immediately. When SJ-210 is left with no battery charge, measurement results
might be erased.

TIP • For more information about the charging procedure, refer to 3.4.1, “Recharging the
built-in battery”.

No. 99MBB122A 2-5

2.3 Screen Hierarchy in the Display
The hierarchy of the screens shown in the display is shown in the following pages.

■ Checking the measurement results

TIP • For information about checking the measurement results, refer to Chapter 5,
“MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Home screen 㧙

Screen showing calculation results for each parameter 5.1.1

Evaluation Profile screen 5.1.2

Graph screen 5.1.3

Condition List screen 5.1.4

■ Setting up parameters from the Home screen

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Home screen 㧙

Main Menu screen 㧙

Calibration Measurement screen Chapter 6

Measurement Conditions Menu screen Chapter 7

Measurement Result Menu screen Chapter 9

Parameter Setup screen Chapter 8

Operating Environment Setup menu screen Chapter 10

Screen Change Menu screen Chapter 11

Sampling Lengths Result screen 5.2

2-6 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

■ Calibration Measurement screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about calibration, refer to Chapter 6, “CALIBRATION”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Calibration Measurement screen 㧙

Calibration Menu screen 㧙

Nominal Value Setup screen 6.4

Calibration Condition Setup screen 㧙

Number of Measurement Setup screen 6.5.1

Roughness Standard Setup screen 6.5.2

Filter Setup screen 6.5.3

Cutoff Length Setup screen 6.5.4

Number of Sampling Lengths Setup screen 6.5.5

Arbitrary Length Setup screen 6.5.6

Traversing Speed Setup screen 6.5.7

Measurement Range Setup screen 6.5.8

Calibration History screen 6.6

Stylus Alarm screen 6.7

Threshold Setup screen

No. 99MBB122A 2-7

■ Measurement Condition Menu screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about setting the measurement conditions, refer to Chapter 7,
“MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Measurement Conditions Menu screen 㧙

Measurement Conditions screen 㧙

Measurement Condition Save Location screen 7.13.2

Internal Memory Save screen

Save New screen

Memory Card Save screen

Roughness Standard Setup screen 7.2

Evaluation Profile Setup screen 7.3

Parameter Setup screen 7.4, Chapter 8

Filter Setup screen 7.5

Cutoff Value (λc) Setup screen 7.6

Cutoff Value (λc) Setup screen

Number of Sampling Lengths Setup screen 7.7

Arbitrary Length Setup screen 7.8

Pre-travel/Post-travel Setup screen 7.9

Traversing Speed Setup screen 7.10

Measurement Range Setup screen 7.11

Measurement Condition Load Select screen 7.13.3

Internal Memory Load screen

Memory Card Load screen

Measurement Condition Deletion Select screen 7.13.4

Internal Memory Deletion screen

Memory Card Delete screen

Measurement Condition File Rename Selection screen 7.13.5

Internal Memory File Rename screen

Memory Card File Rename screen

2-8 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

■ Measurement Result Menu screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about the measurement results data control, refer to Chapter 9,
“MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELETE/RENAME)”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Measurement Result Menu screen 㧙

Loading Folder Select screen 9.4

Measurement Result Load screen

Measurement Result Search screen

Save Folder Select screen 9.5

Measurement Result Save screen

Save New screen

Measurement Result Search screen

Delete Folder Select screen 9.6

Measurement Result Deletion screen

Measurement Result Search screen

File Rename Folder Select screen 9.7

Measurement Result File Rename screen

File Rename screen

Measurement Result Search screen

No. 99MBB122A 2-9

■ Parameter Setup screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about setting the parameters, refer to Chapter 8, “MODIFYING
PARAMETERS”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Parameter Setup screen 8.2

Submenu screen 㧙

GO/NG Judgment Rule Setup screen 8.3

Judgment Rule Setup screen

Upper Limit Setup screen

Lower Limit Setup screen

Setting Details Selection screen 㧙

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen 8.4.1

Count Level Setup screen

HSC Setup screen 8.4.2

Count Level Setup screen

mr Setup screen 8.4.3

Reference Line Setup screen

Slice Depth Setup screen

mr(c) Setup screen 8.4.4

Slice Level Setup screen

δc Setup screen 8.4.5

Reference Line Setup screen

Slice Level Setup screen

2-10 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

■ Environment Setup Menu screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about setting the environment, refer to Chapter 10, “OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT SETUP”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Operating Environment Setup menu screen 㧙

Date/Time screen 10.2

Date/Time Setup screen

Data Output Setup screen 10.3.1, 10.3.2,

10.3.3, 10.3.4

Print Setup screen 10.3.2, 10.3.2.1

Vertical Print Magnification Setup screen 10.3.2.2

Horizontal Print Magnification Setup screen

Language Selection screen 10.4

Drive Unit Setup screen 10.5

Calibration Setup screen

Nominal Value Setup screen

Unit Selection screen 10.6

Decimal Point selection screen 10.7

Volume Adjustment screen 10.8

Function Restriction Setup screen 10.9

Password Setup screen

Memory Card Setup screen 10.10.1, 10.10.2,

10.10.3, 10.10.4

Usage Condition screen 10.10.2

Text File Saving Setup screen 10.10.3

Backup screen 10.10.5

Auto-Sleep Setup screen 10.11

Waiting Time Setup screen

Self-Timer Setup screen 10.12

Waiting Time Setup screen

No. 99MBB122A 2-11

 Screen Hierarchy Related section

PC Communication Setup screen 10.13

Communication Speed Setup screen

Parity Setup screen

Detector Position Display screen 10.14

LCD/Key Test screen 10.15

Version information 10.17

■ Screen Change Menu screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about switching the measurement display directions, refer to Chapter
11, “SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Screen Change Menu screen 㧙

Calculation Result Display Setup screen 11.3

Evaluation Profile Display Setup screen 11.4

Graph Display Setup screen 11.5

Condition List Display Setup screen 11.6

Condition Display Setup screen 11.7

Display Direction Setup screen 11.8

■ Sampling Lengths Result screen sub-screens

TIP • For information about displaying the sampling lengths result, refer to 5.2, “Sampling
Length Result Display”.

Screen Hierarchy Related section

Sampling Lengths Result screen 5.2

Screen showing measurement results

(at each sampling length) for each parameter

2-12 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

2.4 Displaying the Guide Screen

The SJ-210 operation keys have various functions that correspond to each screen.
Functions of the operation keys on each screen can be checked on the Guide screen. This
section explains the Guide screen and the functions of the operation keys.
When the [Esc/Guide] key is pressed on the screens (such as Parameter Calculation
Results screen, Evaluation Profile screen, Condition List screen), the Guide screen
corresponding to each screen appears.

Calculation Result screen Evaluation Profile screen Condition List screen

Guide screen

The following icons are used in the Guide screen. The table below explains the
function/meaning of the icons.

Calculation Result screen

Operation keys Function

Displays the SJ-210 Measurement Condition Loading screen.

Displays the Measurement Condition Setup screen.

Turns the power off by keeping pressing.

Calls the Main Menu screen.

Changes the cutoff length.

Changes the number of sampling lengths.

No. 99MBB122A 2-13

 Evaluation Profile screen

Operation keys Function

Switches the direction for zooming in/out to the horizontal
direction.

Switches the direction for zooming in/out to the vertical

direction.

Turns the power off by keeping pressing.

Calls the Main Menu screen.

Zooms in/out the evaluation profiles.

Scrolls the evaluation profiles to the right and left.

Condition List screen

Operation keys Function

Turns the power off by keeping pressing.

Calls the Main Menu screen.

Switches the page of the Condition List screen.

None

2-14 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

2.5 Entering Numeric Values/Characters

It is sometimes necessary to enter numeric values (including “-” and “_”) or characters
(alphabet) for such operations as modifying the measurement condition with the SJ-210.
This section explains how to enter a numeric value or a character.

■ Key operation required to enter a numeric value or a character to modify the measurement condition

When entering a numeric value or a character, select a specific digit place for an
increment. Numeric values include the symbols “-” and “_”.
The following keys are used to enter a numeric value or a character.

 [ ↑ ] key: Count-up (increment the numeric value or the character)

 [ ↓ ] key: Count-down (decrease the numeric value or the character)

 [ ← ] key: Shift the input cursor to the left

 [ → ] key: Shift the input cursor to the right

 [Red] key: Changing the available character type for entering (numeric values or
characters)

 [Enter/Menu] key: Accepting the entered numeric value

The operating procedures are explained using an example where a file name is modified
from “09081801” to “090818R3” when specifying a new measurement condition.

NOTE • Do not press the [Enter/Menu] key before the numeric value has been entered. Only
press the [Enter/Menu] key to terminate numeric value entry and accept it at that point in
time.

1 Press the [ → ] key to move cursor to the 8th digit.

2 Press the [ ↑ ] key two times.

No. 99MBB122A 2-15

  The 8th digit changes to “3”.

3 Press the [ ← ] key once.

 Cursor moves to the 7th digit.

4 Press the “ABC” ([Red] key).

 The character type for entering changes from numeric values to

alphabets.

2-16 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

5 Press the [ ↑ ] key or [ ↓ ] key until “R” appears.

6 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The entered value is accepted.

No. 99MBB122A 2-17

2.6 List of Icons
The following icons are used in the display to express the function/meaning of the buttons.

■ Battery

Icon Meaning

Indicates the state of the built-in battery being charged.

Indicates the state of the battery switch being OFF or abnormal

battery status.

Indicates the state of the built-in battery being fully charged or

almost fully charged. (Battery remainder: 100 to 80%)

Indicates the battery remainder.(Battery remainder: 80 to 60%)

Indicates the battery remainder.(Battery remainder: 60 to 40%)

Indicates the battery remainder.(Battery remainder: 40 to 20%)

Indicates the battery remainder being empty.

■ Card

Icon Meaning
Indicates the memory card is being recognized.

■ Data output

Icon Meaning
Indicates the data output destination is SPC when the
[POWER/DATA] key is pressed.
It also indicates the parameter for the SPC output is being
selected when appearing in the upper left-hand corner of a
parameter title.

Indicates the data output destination is printer when the

[POWER/DATA] key is pressed.

Indicates the command transmission with the PC is being

performed.
In this case, the [POWER/DATA] key is not related.

2-18 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

Icon Meaning
Indicates the data output destination is memory card when the
[POWER/DATA] key is pressed.

Indicates the displayed contents on screens are stored on the

memory card in the BMP file format, when the [POWER/DATA]
key is pressed.

■ Main Menu

The following table explains settings for various functions and major items of operations.

Icon Meaning
Performs the calibration measurement and specifies the
calibration measurement conditions.

Specifies the measurement conditions.

Controls the measurement results.

Performs the parameter setup.

Performs the environment setup.

Switches the measurement display directions.

Displays the sampling lengths result.

■ Calibration measurement

The following table explains the functions related to calibration measurement and items of
operations.

Icon Meaning
Urges to start the measurement.

Indicates the nominal value of the precision roughness

specimen.

Indicates the calibration measurement result.

Specifies the nominal values.

No. 99MBB122A 2-19

 Icon Meaning
Specifies the calibration measurement conditions.

Checks the calibration history.

Checks the stylus alarm (cumulative distance) and specifies the

threshold.

■ Measurement conditions and results

Icon Meaning
Specifies the measurement conditions.

Loads the saved measurement conditions/results.

Saves the measurement results.

Deletes the saved measurement conditions/results.

Changes the file name of the saved measurement

conditions/results.

Loads the Save10 data.

■ Environment Setup

The following table explains each setting for instruments and items of indicators.

Icon Meaning
Specifies the Date/Time.

Performs the data output.

Switches the display language.

Performs the drive unit setup.

Switches the units.

2-20 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

Icon Meaning
Switches the decimal points.

Adjusts the volume.

Specifies the function restriction.

Performs the setup for memory cards.

Performs the auto-sleep function setup.

Performs the self timer function setup.

Performs the setup for the pc-to-pc communication and the

RS-232C.

 Displays the detector position.

Performs the LCD/Key test.

Initialize all settings.

Displays the version information.

Indicates that the buzzer volume is set to mute.

Indicates that the buzzer function works properly.

■ Operation and setup for screens

Icon Meaning
Indicates that the screen returns to the Home screen when the
[Blue] key is pressed.

Indicates that the cursor keys can be used for operations.

No. 99MBB122A 2-21

 ■ Messages

Icon Meaning
Indicates that the state of the instruments (e.g., “XXX is in
progress”) and a message providing some information.

Indicates an alarm message.

Indicates an alarm message that is more serious.

2-22 No. 99MBB122A

 2. OPERATION KEYS AND DISPLAY OF THE SJ-210

2.7 Screen Settings

The number of the parameters to be displayed can be increased and the display direction
can be changed as desired.

TIP • For information about changing the display screen setup, refer to Chapter 11,
“SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN”.

Vertical display example

Horizontal display example

Displaying multiple parameters

No. 99MBB122A 2-23

MEMO

2-24 No. 99MBB122A

 3 SETTING UP THE SJ-210
This chapter explains the attachment procedure and the initial
settings of the drive/detector unit.

3.1 SJ-210 Settings

The following settings must be made before making measurements with the SJ-210.

 Installing the drive/detector unit and the detector

The SJ-210 is shipped with the display unit, detector, and drive unit packed separately.
Connect the three units with connecting cables.
This section explains how to attach and detach the drive/detector unit.

 Applying the display protection sheet

Apply the display protection sheet on the display of the display unit.
This section explains how to attach the display protection sheet.

 Turning on the power supply

Recharge the built-in battery of the display unit and turn the power on.
This section also explains turning the power of/off during usual operations.

 Initial settings
Set up the items such as the date (including the time) and the display language.

 Using the carrying case

For safe use of the SJ-210, put the display unit in the carrying case,
following the procedures given in this chapter.

No. 99MBB122A 3-1

3.2 Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit
3.2.1 Attaching and detaching the detector
The detector can be detached from the drive unit. After completing a measurement task
with the SJ-210, detach the detector from the drive unit and store it in a safe place to
prevent damage caused by such as a blow, etc.

IMPORTANT • Turn off the drive unit before you attach or detach the detector. Attaching or detaching
the detector while the drive unit is on can result in damage to the unit.
• Attach and detach the detector when the drive unit is at the origin point position. When
the drive unit is not at the origin point position, attaching or detaching the detector can
be difficult and might also damage the unit.

Detector

Connector

Drive unit at the origin point position

Detector

Connector

Drive unit not at the origin point position

3-2 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

IMPORTANT • Always hold the detector body when attaching or detaching the detector. If the tip or
stylus is held during attachment or detachment, the detector may be damaged.

Drive unit

Detector

How to hold the detector

IMPORTANT • Never touch the stylus, otherwise, it may be damaged.

Stylus

Stylus

No. 99MBB122A 3-3

■ Attaching the detector

IMPORTANT • When fitting the detector into the drive unit, do not force the detector. Doing so
may damage the instrument.
• The detector moves smoothly at first being fitted with the guide way in the drive
unit, then pins of the connectors on the detector and the drive unit must be fitted
to each other. After the detector is felt tight in the guide of the drive unit, further
push in the detector until it stops with the pins on the connectors fitted.
When the detector (the standard/retracting type) is firmly fitted in the drive unit,
the screw position on the top of the detector is aligned with the end face of the
drive unit, as shown in the following illustration of the standard detector type.
Screw

End face

After the detector is attached

1 Reposition the drive unit to the origin point position.

Once you have confirmed that the drive unit is at the origin point position, proceed to
step 2.

TIP • When the detector is in retracted position, you must first release the retraction. For
information about releasing the detector from retraction, refer to 15.2, “Retracting the
Detector”.

a Press the [POWER/DATA] key to turn on the power.

b Press the [START/STOP] key to move the connector position of the drive unit to
the origin.
When you have moved the drive unit to the origin point position, the drive unit
returns to the origin after performing a measurement.

c Press the [Esc/Guide] key to turn the power off.

3-4 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

2 After confirming the orientation of both detector and drive unit connectors (pin
positions), gently and straightforward insert the detector into the drive unit hole.

Connector view Drive unit

(Detector)

Detector
Connector view
(Drive unit)

Set the detector

with the stylus
facing downward.

Attaching the detector

■ Detaching the detector

With the drive unit at the origin point position, quietly pull out the detector from the drive
unit.
Drive unit

Detector

Detaching the detector

No. 99MBB122A 3-5

3.2.2 Attaching and detaching the drive/detector unit
Follow the method below to attach and detach the drive/detector unit to/from the display
unit.

■ Detaching the drive/detector unit

1 While pressing section A in the direction indicated by the arrow (1), erect the
drive/detector unit in the direction indicated by the arrow (2). Pull out the
drive/detector unit from the hook on the drive/detector unit retaining plate

2 While pulling out section B in the direction indicated by the arrow (3), detach the
drive/detector unit from the drive/detector unit retaining pin.
B

(3)
(1)

(2)

Position of the drive/detector unit retaining pin

A

Drive/detector unit retaining plate Drive/detector unit retaining pin

Detaching the drive/detector unit

IMPORTANT • Do not hold the detector when detaching the drive/detector unit. Otherwise, the detector
may be damaged.

3-6 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

■ Mounting the drive/detector unit

1 Push the drive/detector unit all the way into the display unit as indicated by the arrow
(1). It fits with the drive unit retaining pin.

2 Lower the drive/detector unit in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) while
pressing it in the direction indicated by the other arrow (1) until it is caught by the
hook on the drive unit retaining plate.

(1)

(2)

Position of the drive/detector unit retaining pin

Drive/detector unit retaining plate Drive/detector unit retaining pin

Mounting the drive/detector unit

No. 99MBB122A 3-7

3.2.3 Plugging in and unplugging the display unit cable

IMPORTANT • These connections (or disconnections) should be made while the power to the SJ-210 is
off (or in the auto-sleep mode).

■ Disconnecting the display unit cable

1 Slide the section to be held in the direction indicated by the arrow (1) and remove
the drive/detector unit connection plug from the socket connector at the rear of the
drive/detector unit.
Drive/detector unit

Display unit cable

Connector
Section to Drive/detector unit
be held (1) connection plug

Disconnecting the display unit cable

■ Connecting the display unit cable

1 After confirming the orientation of the socket connector (pin positions) at the
drive/detector unit and that of the drive/detector unit connection plug (pin positions),
insert the plug into the connector.

Rear of drive/detector unit

Connector

Display unit cable

Drive/detector unit
Drive/detector unit connection plug

Section to be held

Connecting the display unit cable

3-8 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

3.2.4 Using the connection cable

To operate the drive/detector unit separately from the display unit, use the connection
cable as shown below.

Display Unit

Connection cable

Drive/detector unit

Using the connection cable

No. 99MBB122A 3-9

■ Plugging in and unplugging the connection cable

Plug in and unplug the connection cable as shown below:

View in the connector Drive/detector unit
direction connection plug
C

Connector
Connection cable
View in the
connector direction

Connector View in the plug

direction

Plug

Drive/detector unit B
A

View in the connector

direction

Connection cable

 Connecting the drive/detector unit connection plug

Check the orientation of the mating connector and plug, then connect the connector
and the plug while firmly holding section C.

 Disconnecting the drive/detector unit connection plug

Pull out the plug while firmly holding section C.

 Connecting the connection cable plug

Check the orientation of the mating connector and plug, then insert the plug into the
drive unit connector while firmly holding section B.

 Disconnecting the connection cable plug

While holding the section A, slide A towards B, then pull out the plug.

3-10 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

■ Retaining the connection cable

The connection cable should be positioned such that it is held in place by the hook
provided on the bottom of the display unit.
Bottom of the display unit

Connection cable

Hook

Retaining the connection cable

No. 99MBB122A 3-11

3.3 Attaching the Display Protection Sheet
■ Attaching the display protection sheet

NOTE • Before attaching the display protection sheet, wipe the display clean using a dry cloth.

1 Peel the separator (sheet protecting the self-adhesive surface) from the display
protection sheet.

2 Put the display protection sheet in place and press the entire surface lightly using a
dry cloth.

Display protection sheet Stra

Attaching the display protection sheet

■ Replacement of the display protection sheet

Check the condition of the protection sheet after completing a measurement task. Replace
the protection sheet if it is heavily soiled or if the display cannot be viewed easily.

A replacement of the display protection sheet can be purchased from your SJ-210 dealer.

࡮Display protection sheet

Part No. Qty

12BAK820 1

12AAL066 5

3-12 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

3.4 Power Supply

A built-in battery and an AC adapter are provided to supply power to the SJ-210.
When a built-in battery is used, the SJ-210 itself can turn the power on without connecting
the AC adapter to the SJ-210.
When an external power supply is available, connect the AC adapter to the SJ-210 and
turn on the power.

IMPORTANT • Upon purchase the built-in battery switch is set to OFF. Be sure to set the built-in battery
switch to ON before using this instrument.
• When the AC adapter is connected while the built-in battery switch is set to OFF, the
below icon is displayed. Disconnect the AC adapter, set the built-in battery switch to ON,
and then reconnect the AC adapter.

The icon when the built-in battery switch is OFF.

• When the built-in battery power is almost consumed, the power cannot be turned on.
Charge the built-in battery to drive the SJ-210 again with the battery. However, notice
that the measurement conditions and results saved in the built-in memory are cleared.
• When the built-in battery switch is OFF, the measurement results and conditions are
cleared. Keep the built-in battery switch ON unless the SJ-210 is not used for a long
period of time (more than 2 to 3 weeks).
• The following items are saved in the SJ-210's internal memory even when the built-in
battery switch is OFF or when the internal battery is replaced.
• Detector calibration factor
• Drive unit traversing speed calibration factor
• Drive unit type
• Language
• Unit
• Decimal Point
• Date Format

No. 99MBB122A 3-13

3.4.1 Recharging the built-in battery
At the point of purchase, the built-in battery is not fully charged. Also, the built-in battery
switch is set to OFF. Before using the SJ-210, set the built-in battery switch to ON, and
charge the built-in battery.

NOTE • The built-in battery cannot be recharged when the built-in battery on/off switch is set to
OFF. Make sure to set the battery switch to ON as explained below.

TIP • When almost all the built-in battery power is exhausted, it takes about maximum 4 hours
to fully recharge it.

■ Recharging the built-in battery

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕
Rear cover

Detaching the rear cover

3 Set the built-in battery on/off switch to ON.

Built-in battery on/off switch

OFF ON

Built-in battery on/off switch

4 Fit the rear cover to the hollow of the rear of the display unit in the direction indicated
by the arrow (1).

3-14 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

5 Push the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and attach it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕 Rear cover

Attaching the rear cover

6 Connect the AC adapter to the wall outlet.

7 Remove the connector cap from the rear cover, then insert the AC adapter plug into
the connector.

Connector cap

AC adapter plug

Connection of the AC adapter

No. 99MBB122A 3-15

  When the AC adapter is connected to the display unit, recharging of the battery
automatically starts.
The icon indicating the progress of charging appears during charging the
battery. When fully charged, the icon disappears.

Recharging progress icon

 When the built-in battery is fully charged or almost fully charged, recharging
does not start even when the AC adapter is connected to the display unit.
In this case, the icon indicating that the battery is fully charged appears on the
display for several seconds.

Full-charge icon

NOTE • Do not turn off the built-in battery on/off switch during charging. Charging is terminated
when the switch is turned off.
• Never connect/disconnect the AC adapter during recharging. Otherwise, recharging
may stop before the built-in battery is fully charged.

3-16 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

3.4.2 Turning on the power supply

■ Power supply from a built-in battery (when using a built-in battery)

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕
Rear cover

Detaching the rear cover

3 Set the built-in battery on/off switch to ON.

Built-in battery on/off switch

OFF ON

Built-in battery on/off switch

4 Fit the rear cover to the hollow of the rear of the display unit in the direction indicated
by the arrow (1).

5 Push the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and attach it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕 Rear cover

Attaching the rear cover

No. 99MBB122A 3-17

 6 Press the [POWER/DATA] key.

[POWER/DATA] key

Operation key ([POWER/DATA] key)

TIP • The icon showing that recharging is in progress also stays on during auto-sleep. For
more information about recharging the built-in battery, refer to 3.4.1, “Recharging the
built-in battery”.
For more information about setting auto-sleep, refer to 3.4.3, “Setting the auto-sleep
function when using the built-in battery”.

3-18 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

■ Power supply from an AC adapter (when using an AC adapter)

IMPORTANT • Do not connect the AC adapter to a power line which may cause electrical interference.
Although this instrument has reasonable protection against electrical interference,
supplying power from such a line may hamper correct measurement.
• When you have removed the rear cover of the display unit, take care and do not have
the AC adapter plug contact with the SPC or RS-232C connector. Instrument failure
results.

1 Set the built-in battery on/off switch to ON. For more information about the built-in
battery on/off switch, refer to “■ Power supply from a built-in battery (when using a
built-in battery)”.
Proceed to the next step once the battery switch is on.

2 Connect the AC adapter to the wall outlet.

3 Remove the connector cap from the rear cover, then insert the AC adapter plug into
the connector.

Connector cap

AC adapter plug

Connection of the AC adapter

4 Press the [POWER/DATA] key.

[POWER/DATA] key

No. 99MBB122A 3-19

 Operation key ([POWER/DATA] key㧕

IMPORTANT • If the instrument is forcibly turned OFF while writing to the internal memory (during
re-calibration, etc.), the data written to the memory may become invalid.
Do not suddenly switch OFF the built-in battery or unplug the AC adapter during
operation.
If the contents of the internal memory have become invalid, all settings are reset and the
following message is displayed right after the unit is turned back ON.
At this time all settings are reset to their initial values.
When this message is displayed, gain calibration and speed calibration must be
performed.

Total reset message

NOTE • When the AC adapter is connected and the [POWER/DATA] key is pressed to turn the
power on, recharging progress indicator may appear on the display.
While the recharging progress indicator is showing, press the [POWER/DATA] key
again to turn on the power normally.

Home screen

Press
[POWER/DATA] key
again

Indication condition of charge

3-20 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

■ Turning the power off

The following two methods are available for tuning the power off.

 Power off keeping pressing the [Esc/Guide] key

 Power off with auto-sleep in use of the built-in battery

● Power off keeping pressing the [Esc/Guide] key

Keep pressing the [Esc/Guide] key to turn the power off.

[Esc/Guide] key

Operation key ([Esc/Guide] key)

No. 99MBB122A 3-21

● Power off with auto-sleep in use of the built-in battery

With the built-in battery in use and auto-sleep set to ON, when the SJ-210 is not operated
for more than a constant time after power-on, the power is automatically turned off with the
auto-sleep function.

Even when the power is turned off by the auto-sleep function, the measurement conditions
and results are retained and are displayed the next time the power is turned on.

NOTE • When a request signal (REQUEST signal) is input from an external device during SPC
data output, the SJ-210 power is not turned off for a specified period of time after signal
input.
• When the power is being supplied by the AC adapter, the auto-sleep function is
disabled.
To turn the power off, keep pressing the [Esc/Guide] key.

TIP • For more information about the auto-sleep function, refer to 3.4.3, “Setting the
auto-sleep function when using the built-in battery”.

3-22 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

3.4.3 Setting the auto-sleep function when using the built-in battery
The SJ-210 is capable of setting the auto-sleep function in use of the built-in battery.

NOTE • When the AC adapter is used, auto-sleep does not function irrespective of the setting of
the auto-sleep function. To turn off the SJ-210 power, press and hold the [Esc/Guide]
key.

TIP • For information about setting the auto-sleep function, refer to 10.11, “Setting the
auto-sleep function”.

No. 99MBB122A 3-23

3.5 Initial Settings
To start using the SJ-210, you must complete the initial settings.

Initial settings include the following items.

Setup item Description Related

section
Date Specify the date and time. Date can be included into the 10.2
measurement condition record and useful for record control.

Display When necessary, change the language for the display. The 10.4
language language can be selected from 16 languages including
Japanese, English, and German.

Switch unit When necessary, change the unit for the data such as the 10.6
measurement results shown on the display.

Decimal When necessary, change the decimal point type for the data 10.7
Point such as the measurement results shown on the display.

Buzzer You can adjust the volume of the buzzer that sounds when the 10.8
volume operation keys are pressed.

IMPORTANT • Connect the AC adapter to prevent power to the instrument from being interrupted
during operation.
• When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. If operations are
performed when the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off during operation.

3-24 No. 99MBB122A

 3. SETTING UP THE SJ-210

3.6 Carrying Case

The supplied carrying case is convenient for safekeeping, protecting, and transporting the
SJ-210.

It is also possible to perform measurement with the drive/detector unit being connected via
connecting cable to the display unit housed in the case.

Display protection sheet Strap

Lid

Upper lid

Carrying case

■ Opening the upper lid

Open the upper lid as shown below, and the LCD display of the display unit is located,
permitting operation of the primary operation keys.

When not in use, close the upper lid for safekeeping.

Upper lid

Upper lid

No. 99MBB122A 3-25

■ Connecting the connecting cable

There are windows on both sides of the carrying case as shown below, through which you
can connect the display unit in the case to the external drive/detector unit.

Window for connecting cable Window for each connecting cable

The side of the carrying case

■ Housing accessories

Accessories of SJ-210 can be stored to the carrying case in position as specified below.
Space for detectors (4 pcs)
[For keeping standard and optional detectors or extension rods.]

Space for calibration stage and precision roughness specimen.

Accessories housing position

3-26 No. 99MBB122A

 4 MEASUREMENT
OPERATION
In this chapter, the surface roughness measurement with the SJ-210
is described according to the general procedures.

4.1 Overall Measurement Flow

Overall measurement flow is described below.
There are two types of operations: general operations and operations on demand. In the
flow chart below, solid lines indicate general operations and dotted line indicates
operations on demand.

Set up the SJ-210 (attaching/detaching the drive/detector unit,

Settings the SJ-210
and cable connection, etc.) according to the shape of the
→ “3.2 Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit” workpiece to be measured.

Turning on the power supply Select either the AC adapter or built-in battery as the power
supply. Recharge the built-in battery as required.
→ “3.4 Power Supply”

Calibration is a means of adjusting the detector gain so that the

Performing calibration
SJ-210 can yield correct measurements. This can be easily
→ “Chapter 6 CALIBRATION” performed by measuring a supplied precision roughness
specimen.

Modifying the measurement conditions Modify the measurement conditions.

For information about measurement conditions that can be
→ “Chapter 7 MODIFYING THE MEASUREMENT
modified, refer to the next page.
CONDITIONS”

Measure the roughness specimen and display the result.

Executing the actual measurement of the roughness specimen
→ “4.3 Measurement”

Measurement results can be saved, printed, output as SPC

Recording measurement results
data, and communicated with a personal computer.
→ “4.4 Measurement Result Management”

After measurement, store the SJ-210 safely by detaching the

Daily maintenance
drive/detector unit, etc.
→ “Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF
SJ-210”

No. 99MBB122A 4-1

■ List of measurement conditions that can be modified

The following table shows the measurement conditions that can be modified by the user.
When they are not modified, then measurement is performed according to the default
values (factory settings).

TIP • For information about modifying the measurement conditions, refer to Chapter 7,
“MODIFYING THE MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS”.

Related
Measurement conditions Default value Remark
section

Nominal value 2.950 m Enter the value of the precision roughness specimen. 6.4
(116.14 in)

Roughness standard ISO1997 Set to the desired standard. 7.2

Evaluation profiles Roughness profile 7.3

Roughness parameter Only Ra, Rq, Rz Parameters to be yielded can be set on/off as required. 7.4

Filters GAUSS 7.5

Cutoff length (sampling 0.8 mm 7.6

length) (0.03 in)

λs 2.5 m (100in)

Number of sampling ×5 7.7

lengths

Arbitrary evaluation length None When measurement is not performed with the cutoff length and the 7.8
number of sampling lengths provided by the SJ-210, set an arbitrary length
for measuring.

To include ON Since the existing roughness standards require the pre-travel/post-travel 7.9
pre-travel/post-travel length to be included in the traversing length, the setting is usually set to
length in the traversing “ON”. However, when these lengths can not be traced due to the limited
length space, the setting can be changed to “OFF”.

Measurement speed 0.5 mm/s Default measuring speed (driving speed) can be modified. 7.10
(0.020 in/s)

Measurement range AUTO 7.11

Application of GO/NG None Set the upper or lower roughness limit to discriminate between measured 8.3
judgment and the range workpieces to be accepted or rejected.

Drive Standard The default value for the SJ-210 is “Standard”. 10.5

Communication speed 38400 bps Change this to a communication speed when communicating with a 10.13
personal computer. Select one from 9600 bps, 19200 bps, or 38400 bps.

Parity NONE Select one from EVEN, ODD, or NONE.

Auto-sleep setup ON Sets the auto-sleep function to ON/OFF in use of the built-in battery, 10.11

4-2 No. 99MBB122A

 4. MEASUREMENT OPERATION

4.2 Calibration
Depending on the usage of the SJ-210, calibration should be performed periodically. In
addition, when the instrument is used for the first time or when the detector has been
attached or detached, calibration is necessary.

Without properly calibrating the instrument, correct measurements can not be obtained.

TIP • For information about calibration, refer to Chapter 6, “CALIBRATION”.

No. 99MBB122A 4-3

4.3 Measurement
To start measurement, set the SJ-210 on a workpiece and press the [START/STOP] key.
While measurement is being performed, the measured profile is displayed. After
measurement has been completed, the measurement result is displayed for confirmation.

4.3.1 Setting the workpiece and SJ-210

■ Setting the workpiece and SJ-210

When the workpiece surface is larger than the SJ-210, place the SJ-210 on the workpiece.

For surface roughness measurement to be successful, it should be performed on a firm

base that is insulated as well as possible from all sources of vibration. When
measurement is performed being subject to significant vibrations, results may be
unreliable.

TIP • In cases where the measured surface is smaller than the SJ-210 or where the surface is
curved (cylindrical, etc.), install the SJ-210 using an appropriate optional accessory. For
information about optional accessories, refer to Chapter 14, “INSTALLING THE SJ-210
WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES”.

1 Position the work piece so that the measured surface is level.

2 Place the SJ-210 on the workpiece.

In this operation, support the SJ-210 by reference surfaces A and B on the bottom of
the driving unit, as shown below.

Setting the SJ-210 on the workpiece

4-4 No. 99MBB122A

 4. MEASUREMENT OPERATION

3 Confirm that the stylus is in proper contact with the measured surface.
In addition, confirm that the detector is parallel to the measured surface.

 Front view of detector

Detector
90 degree

Measured surface

 Side view of detector

Detector

Measured surface
Checking the detector position

No. 99MBB122A 4-5

4.3.2 Starting measurement

NOTE • Measurement can not be started when the low battery voltage alarm indicator is
flashing. Connect the AC adapter, or charge the battery. Refer to 3.4, “Power Supply” for
details.

■ Operation procedure
Home screen
1 Press the [START/STOP] key on the Home screen.

Measurement Waveform Display screen

 The detector starts traversing to perform measurement.
While measurement is being performed (detector is traversing), the
Measurement Waveform Display screen is displayed.

NOTE • Press the [START/STOP] key during measurement to stop

for unavoidable reasons.

Home screen
 After the measurement has been completed, the measured value
is displayed.

TIP • For information about the measurement results, refer to

Chapter 5, “MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY”.

4-6 No. 99MBB122A

 4. MEASUREMENT OPERATION

4.4 Measurement Result Management

The latest measurement results are retained in the memory of the SJ-210. Using a
memory card (optional), the SJ-210 can save the measurement results up to 10,000 cases
of measurements.

4.4.1 Loading/Saving/Deleting/Renaming measurement results

The operation flow of saving measurement results is explained here.

NOTE • A memory card (optional) is required to perform loading/saving/deleting/renaming of

measurement results.

TIP • A memory card (optional) is required to perform loading/saving/deleting/renaming of

measurement results.
• For information about loading/saving/deleting/renaming measurement results, refer to
Chapter 9, “MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELETE/RENAME)”.

■ Procedure for saving measurement results

1 After measurement, switch the screens in the following order: Home → Main Menu
→ Measurement Result

2 Select “Save” with the cursor key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

3 Navigate to the save location folder with the cursor key, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

4 Select “Save New” with the cursor key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

5 Specify the file name, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The measurement results are saved.

4.4.2 Outputting the measurement results

The SJ-210 has the function to output the measurement results (saved in the SJ-210
memory or the memory card) to a Mitutoyo Digimatic Data Processor (DP-1VR, etc.) or
personal computers.

The SJ-210 also has the function to print the measurement results when connected to a
printer (optional accessory).

TIP • For information about outputting the measurement results, refer to Chapter 13, “SAVE
AND OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY”.

No. 99MBB122A 4-7

MEMO

4-8 No. 99MBB122A

 5 MEASUREMENT RESULT
DISPLAY
The results of the measurements performed using the SJ-210 can be
displayed in various formats.

The SJ-210 has the functions to display the following calculation results and conditions
after performing measurement and recalculation. The measurement results to be
displayed can be switched by pressing the [PAGE] key.
In addition, the state of display can be set up according to the operational conditions.

 Parameter calculated results display

The display can be set up to show the calculated results vertically/horizontally on the
screens. It can also be set up to show multiple numbers of parameter on one screen.
Using the tracing function, the SJ-210 can store and display the calculation results of
the latest 10 measurements.
The SJ-210 can also show the GO/NG judgment results for parameters.

 Evaluation profile display

The display can be set up to show the calculated results vertically/horizontally on the
screens. It can also be selected whether to show the results on the screen or not.
The waveform can be zoomed in/out to the vertical/horizontal direction.

 BAC/ADC graph display

The display can be set up to show the calculated results vertically/horizontally on the
screens.

 Measurement condition display

The display can be set up to show the calculated results vertically/horizontally on the
screens. It can also be selected whether to show the results on the screen or not.

No. 99MBB122A 5-1

5.1 Switching the Measurement Result Display with
the [PAGE] Key
When the [PAGE] key is pressed on the Home screen, the following measurement results
can be displayed: The calculation results, evaluation profiles, BAC/ADC graphs, and the
measurement condition list for the customized parameters.

[PAGE] key

Operation key ([PAGE] key)

■ Transition of screens when the measurement result display is switched

[PAGE] [PAGE]

Customized parameters
are displayed in turn.

[PAGE] [PAGE]

[PAGE] or [ → ]
[PAGE]

[←]

5-2 No. 99MBB122A

 5. MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY

5.1.1 Switching the parameter display

When displaying the measurement results, the objective parameter to be displayed can be
switched to another customized parameter.

Each time the [PAGE] key is pressed, the displayed parameter that has been selected
using the parameter customize function changes in the following order: “Ra” → “Rq” → “Rz”
→ XXX.
The objective parameters to be displayed are limited to the parameters that have been
customized using the parameter customize function.

TIP • For information about the parameter customize function, refer to 8.2, “Selecting the
Displayed Parameters (Parameter Customization)”.
• For information about switching the display directions, displaying multiple parameters
on one screen, and trace display, refer to 11.3, “Switching Calculation Results Screen”.

[PAGE] [PAGE]

Switching the parameter display

5.1.2 Evaluation profile display

The measurement results can be displayed in the measured profile (evaluation profile).
The Evaluation Profile screen appears after the parameter that has been selected using
the parameter customize function.

Evaluation Profile screen

TIP • For information about setting the display directions and whether to display the
evaluation profile or not, refer to 11.4, “Switching Evaluation Profile Screen”.

No. 99MBB122A 5-3

■ Zooming in/out of the evaluation profile

The evaluation profile displayed on the screen can be zoomed in/out.

The operating procedures are explained using an example where the evaluation profile is
displayed vertically on the screen.
Evaluation Profile screen
1 Press the [PAGE] key to display the Evaluation Profile screen.

2 Select the direction for zooming in/out.

Evaluation Profile screen
a Press the [Blue] key to zoom in/out to the horizontal direction.

 The horizontal scroll bar turns red. It indicates that the evaluation
profile can be zoomed in/out to the horizontal direction.

Evaluation Profile screen

b Press the [Red] key to zoom in/out to the vertical direction.

 The vertical scroll bar turns red. It indicates that the evaluation
profile can be zoomed in/out to the vertical direction.

Evaluation Profile screen

3 Press the [ ↑ ] key to zoom in, and press the [ ↓ ] key to zoom out.

5-4 No. 99MBB122A

 5. MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY
Evaluation Profile screen
4 Press the [ ← ] key and [ → ] key to scroll the evaluation profile.

TIP • Depending on the display directions (vertical, horizontal

(rightward), horizontal (leftward)), the direction keys ([ ↑ ]
[ ↓ ] [ ← ] [ → ]) are assigned with different functions.

• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to display the Guide screen.

Functions of the operation keys can be checked on the
Guide screen. For information about the Guide screen,
refer to 2.4, “Displaying the Guide Screen”.

Guide screen

5.1.3 Graph display

The measurement results can be displayed in the BAC/ADC graphs.
The Graph screen appears after the Evaluation Profile screen.

Graph screen

TIP • For information about setting the display directions and whether to display the
BAC/ADC graphs or not, refer to 11.5, “Switching Graph Display Screen”.

No. 99MBB122A 5-5

5.1.4 Condition list display
The list of the measurement conditions can be displayed. When the saved measurement
results or conditions are loaded, the file name of the loaded data is displayed in “File”.
The Condition List screen appears after the Graph screen.
The [ → ]/[ ← ] key also can be used to switch the display on the Condition List screen.

[PAGE]
or
[→]

[←]

Condition List screen

TIP • For information about setting the display directions and whether to display the condition
list or not, refer to 11.6, “Switching Measurement Conditions List Screen”.

5.1.5 GO/NG judgment result display

When the GO/NG judgment function is used, the measurement data is compared with its
upper and lower tolerance limits. When the measurement falls outside the limits, the
display color of the measurement result changes.

When the measurement is within tolerance limits, the “OK” sign appears to the right of the
parameter name.

GO/NG judgment result (GO)

5-6 No. 99MBB122A

 5. MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY

When the measurement exceeds the upper limit, the “+NG” sign appears to the right of the
parameter name, and the displayed measurement result turns red.

GO/NG judgment result (above the upper limit)

When the measurement falls below the lower limit, the “-NG” sign appears on the right
side of the parameter name. In addition, the part indicating the measurement result turns
blue.

GO/NG judgment result (below the lower limit)

NOTE • When the upper or lower limit is set at 0, the limit is not be enabled for GO/NG
judgment.
The upper limit and lower limit can be set individually. Therefore, it is possible to
individually disable the GO/NG judgment with the upper/lower limits.

TIP • For information about setting the GO/NG judgment function, refer to 8.3, “Setting the
GO/NG Judgment Function”.

No. 99MBB122A 5-7

5.1.6 Trace display
The SJ-210 can save measurement results of the last 10 measurements for every
customized parameter.
The measurement results are displayed in chronological order. The latest measurement
result is displayed in the highest row on the screen. The older measurement results are
displayed in the lower rows in chronological order.
The [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key can be used to switch the displays shown in the lower rows than the
second highest row.
Only the latest measurement result can be saved in the memory card, printed, and output
as SPC data.

㨇 ↓ 㨉

㨇 ↑ 㨉

Trace screen

NOTE • The result data of the measurements performed before the last 10 measurements are
deleted in order from the oldest data.
• The trace data is cleared when the Trace screen is refreshed.
• The trace data may be cleared when the measurement conditions are changed.

TIP • For information about setting the Trace screen, refer to 11.3, “Switching Calculation
Results Screen”.

5-8 No. 99MBB122A

 5. MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY

■ Clearing the trace data

It is possible to clear all of the saved trace data.

Trace screen
1 Press the [Blue] key on the Trace screen.

Trace screen
 A message is displayed to confirm that it is OK to clear the trace
data.

2 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 All of the saved trace data is cleared.

No. 99MBB122A 5-9

 5.2 Sampling Length Result Display
It is possible to check the measurement results at each specified sampling length and the
GO/NG judgment results for each parameter.

■ Screens guide

1 2 3 4
Sampling Lengths Result Measurement Result at Each
Home screen Main Menu screen screen Sampling Length screen

Parameter
“N Result” Selection
[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

■ Operation procedure
Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “N Result” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

5-10 No. 99MBB122A

 5. MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY
Sampling Lengths Result screen
3 To check the measurement results at each sampling length and the
GO/NG judgment results for each parameter, select the desired
parameter with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
When a parameter is selected, the upper and lower roughness limits
that have been specified in the GO/NG judgment settings are
displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Measurement Result at Each

Sampling Length screen
4 Check the measurement results at each sampling length and the
GO/NG judgment results.
When the measurement results are over the upper limit, at each
sampling length, the sampling length part is displayed in red. When the
measurement results are below the lower limit, the sampling length
part is displayed in blue.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 5-11

MEMO

5-12 No. 99MBB122A

 6 CALIBRATION
In this chapter how to perform calibration is described.

The process of calibration involves the measurement of a reference workpiece (precision

roughness specimen) and the adjustment of the difference (gain adjustment), when there
is one between the measured value of the SJ-210 and the reference value (precision
roughness specimen).

Depending on the usage of the SJ-210, calibration should be performed periodically. In

addition, when the instrument is used for the first time or when the detector has been
attached or detached, calibration is necessary.

Without properly calibrating the instrument, correct measurements can not be obtained.

When the drive unit has been changed, first change the drive unit settings. For more
information, refer to 10.5, “Calibrating Drive Unit Speed and Settings”.

No. 99MBB122A 6-1

6.1 Calibration Preparation
To perform calibration, measure the precision roughness specimen and adjust gain so that
measured value is equal to Ra of the precision roughness specimen. Measured surface of
the precision roughness specimen has a series of sine wave shapes, and Ra (nominal
value) is displayed.
Depending on the usage of the SJ-210, calibration should be performed periodically. In
addition, when the instrument is used for the first time or when the detector has been
attached or detached, calibration is necessary.
Without properly calibrating the instrument, correct measurements can not be obtained.

6.1.1 Calibration preparation (standard type, retracting type)

Use the supplied precision roughness specimen for calibration.

NOTE • When calibration needs to be performed with a standard other than the supplied
precision roughness specimen, it must only be done after the default calibration
conditions have been modified so they are suitable for the roughness specimen. For
information about the procedure used to modify the calibration conditions, refer to 6.4,
“Setting the Nominal Value of the Precision Roughness Specimen” and 6.5, “Setting
Calibration Conditions”.

‫ ع‬Setting up the precision roughness specimen, calibration stage, and SJ-210

1 Place the precision roughness specimen and calibration stage on a level table.

Calibration stage

Precision roughness specimen

Precision roughness specimen and calibration stage

6-2 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

2 Mount the SJ-210 on the calibration stage.

Setting of the SJ-210 on to the calibration stage

3 Set the SJ-210 so that the detector traversing direction is perpendicular to the cutter
mark of the precision roughness specimen.

SJ-210

Detector Detector
traversing
direction SJ-210

Cutter mark 90 degree

Detector

Setting positions of the SJ-210 (standard type and detector retracting type)
and precision roughness specimen

No. 99MBB122A 6-3

 4 Confirm that the detector is parallel to the measured surface.

 Front view of detector

Detector
90 degree

Measured surface

 Side view of detector

Detector

Measured surface

Detector position confirmation (standard type, detector retracting type)

6-4 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.1.2 Calibration preparation (transverse tracing type)

Use the supplied precision roughness specimen for calibration.

■ Setting up the precision roughness specimen, calibration stage, and transverse tracing drive unit

1 Place the precision roughness specimen and calibration stage on a level table.

Calibration stage

Precision roughness specimen

Precision roughness specimen and calibration stage

2 Mount the transverse tracing drive unit on the calibration stage.

Transverse tracing drive unit

Setting of the drive unit (transverse tracing type) onto the calibration stage

3 Set the transverse tracing drive unit and precision roughness specimen so that the
detector traversing direction is perpendicular to the cutter mark of the precision
roughness specimen.
Detector

Detector traversing direction

Cutter mark

Precision roughness specimen

90 degree

Setting positions of the drive unit (transverse tracing type) and precision roughness specimen

No. 99MBB122A 6-5

 4 Confirm that the detector is parallel to the measured surface.

 Front view of detector

Detector
90 degree

Measured surface

 Side view of detector

Detector

Measured surface

Detector position confirmation (transverse tracing type)

6-6 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.2 Calibration Condition Setup Screens Guide

■ Screens guide

1 2 4
Home screen Main Menu screen Calibration Measurement screen Calibration Menu screen

[Enter/Menu] 
[Enter/Menu] [Red]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

[START/STOP]
Start calibration measurement
Measurement Waveform Calibration Measurement
Display screen screen

Select items
[Esc/Guide]
[Enter/Menu]

5
Nominal Value Setup Calibration Condition Calibration History
Stylus Alarm screen
screen Setup screen screen

Refer to 6.4 Refer to 6.5 Refer to 6.6 Refer to 6.7

No. 99MBB122A 6-7

■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen
Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Calib. Meas.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Measurement screen

3 Press the “Submenu” ([Red] key).

TIP • To change the nominal value or modify the calibration

conditions, press the “Submenu” ([Red] key) to display
Calibration Menu screen.
When no change is necessary, perform calibration
measurement in this screen.

6-8 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.3 Calibrating the SJ-210

When calibrating the SJ-210 with the roughness specimen supplied, be sure to calibrate
with the default values (factory settings).

■ Default value of the calibration conditions (standard type, retracting type)

Calibrating condition setup item Default value

Nominal value 2.950 μm (116.14 μin)

Roughness standard JIS1994

Filters GAUSS

λc 2.5 mm (0.1 in)

λs NONE

Number of sampling lengths 5

Traversal speed 0.75 mm/s (0.03 in/s)

Measurement range AUTO

■ Default value of the calibration conditions (transverse tracing type)

Calibrating condition setup item Default value

Nominal value 1.000 μm (39.37 μin)

Roughness standard JIS1994

Filters GAUSS

λc 0.8 mm (0.03 in)

λs NONE

Number of sampling lengths 5

Traversal speed 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)

Measurement range AUTO

NOTE • When the SJ-210 needs to be calibrated with a standard other than the supplied
precision roughness specimen, the default calibration conditions must be modified for
the roughness specimen to be used. For information about the procedure used to
modify the calibration conditions, refer to 6.4, “Setting the Nominal Value of the
Precision Roughness Specimen” and 6.5, “Setting Calibration Conditions”.

No. 99MBB122A 6-9

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Calibration Measurement screen
1 Check the calibration conditions on the Calibration Measurement
screen.
When the conditions are different from the precision roughness
specimen, modify the calibration conditions.
If the calibration conditions do not require modification, proceed to the
next step.

TIP • For information about the procedure used to modify the

calibration conditions, refer to 6.4, “Setting the Nominal
Value of the Precision Roughness Specimen” and 6.5,
“Setting Calibration Conditions”.

2 Press the [START/STOP] key.

Measurement Waveform Display
screen
 Start calibration measurement.
A calibration measurement with the precision roughness specimen
is performed, and Measurement Waveform Display screen is
displayed during the calibration measurement (while the detector is
traversing).
When the calibration measurement has been completed, the
measured value is displayed in the lower column.

Calibration Measurement screen

3 Press the “Update” ([Red] key) to update the calibration value.

TIP • To cancel the measured value, press the “Cancel” ([Blue]

key).

Calibration Measurement screen

 The calibration factor is updated.

6-10 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.4 Setting the Nominal Value of the Precision

Roughness Specimen
Set the nominal value according to the precision roughness specimen.

TIP • The nominal value to be set is the Ra value of which the precision roughness specimen
has been calibrated.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Nom Val.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Nominal Value Setup screen

2 Set the nominal value.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

3 Press the [Enter/Menu] key to accept the “Nom Val.”.

TIP • To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead

of the [Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 6-11

 4 Press the [Esc/Guide] key to move to the Calibration Measurement
screen.
Calibration Measurement screen
 The set values appear on the Calibration Measurement screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

6-12 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.5 Setting Calibration Conditions

Set the following calibration conditions according to the precision roughness specimen.

IMPORTANT • The default values of the calibration conditions are in accordance with Mitutoyo's
precision roughness specimen. Unless otherwise required, perform calibration
measurement with the default conditions.

 Number of measurements per charge

 Roughness standard

 Filters

 Cut-off value (λc)

 Number of sampling lengths (N), or evaluation length (arbitrary length)

 Traversal speed

 Measurement range

Calibration measurement settings are specified on the Calibration Condition Setup screen.

NOTE • To reset the calibration conditions collectively to the default values (factory settings),
press the “Initial” ([Red] key) on the Calibration Condition Setup screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-13

6.5.1 Setting the number of measurements

Specify the number of measurements for performing calibration.

The calibration results of specified numbers of measurements are averaged to adjust gain.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “Meas. No.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Number of Measurement Setup

screen
3 Select a measurement number for the calibration with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

6-14 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected the number of measurements appears on the Calibration
Condition Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-15

6.5.2 Modifying the roughness standard

Set the roughness standard according to the precision roughness specimen.

NOTE • Be careful when modifying the roughness standard, as the profile filter may be
automatically modified as a result.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “Standard” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Roughness Standard Setup screen

3 Select roughness standard which is compatible with the precision
roughness specimen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

6-16 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected roughness standard are on the Calibration Condition
Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-17

6.5.3 Modifying profile filters

Set the profile filters according to the precision roughness specimen. Profile filters can be
modified when multiple profile filters which are compatible with roughness standard exist.

SJ-210 modifies the profile filter automatically according to the roughness standard, when
roughness standard is modified.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “Filter” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Filter Setup screen

3 Select profile filter which is compatible with the precision roughness
specimen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

6-18 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected profile filter appears on the Calibration Condition Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-19

6.5.4 Modifying the cutoff length (λc)

Set the cutoff length (λc) according to the precision roughness specimen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “λc” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Cutoff Length Setup screen

3 Select cutoff length which is compatible with the precision roughness
specimen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected cutoff length appears on the Calibration Condition Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

6-20 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.5.5 Modifying the number of sampling lengths (N)

Set the number of sampling lengths (N) according to the precision roughness specimen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “N” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Number of Sampling Lengths

Setup screen
3 Select number of sampling lengths which is compatible with the
precision roughness specimen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected number of sampling lengths appears on the Calibration
Condition Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-21

6.5.6 Setting the evaluation length to an arbitrary length

Set the evaluation length to an arbitrary length according to the precision roughness
specimen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “N” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Number of Sampling
Lengths Setup screen
3 Select “Opt Length” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

6-22 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION
Arbitrary Length Setup screen
4 Set the arbitrary evaluation length, according to the precision
roughness specimen.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key to accept entered values.

Calibration Condition Setup screen
 The set arbitrary evaluation length appears on the Calibration
Condition Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-23

6.5.7 Modifying the traversing speed

Set the traversing speed according to the precision roughness specimen.

Traversing speed to select is restricted depending on the cutoff length (λc).

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “M-Speed” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Traversing Speed Setup screen

3 Select target traversing speed with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected traversing speed appears on the Calibration Condition
Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

6-24 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.5.8 Modifying the measuring range

Set the measuring range according to the precision roughness specimen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Cal. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

2 Select “Range” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Range Setup screen

3 Select measuring range which is compatible with the precision
roughness specimen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Condition Setup screen

 Selected measuring range appears on the Calibration Condition
Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 6-25

6.6 Checking the Calibration History
SJ-210 can store up to 100 date and time information as calibration history.
Check the calibration history following the procedures below.

NOTE • Be aware that the calibration history is completely cleared when the “Clear history”
[Blue] key is pressed.
Also, be aware that the calibration history is completely cleared, when power supply
from built-in battery is cut or “RestToDefault” in the “Set Environ.” is performed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Calib.History” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration History screen

2 Check the data of time of the calibration.

TIP • To clear the calibration history, press the “Clear history”

([Blue] key).

6-26 No. 99MBB122A

 6. CALIBRATION

6.7 Setting the Stylus Alarm

Stylus alarm is a function to notify when to replace the detector or perform regular
calibration by setting the threshold for cumulative measured value.
This section explains how to specify the threshold.

NOTE • Be aware that the cumulative distance is completely cleared, when power supply from
built-in battery is cut or “RestToDefault” in the “Set Environ.” is performed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Calibration Menu screen” in Section 6.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Calibration Menu screen
1 Select “Stylus Alarm” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Stylus Alarm screen

2 Press the “Thresh” ([Red] key).

TIP • To clear the cumulative distance, press the “ClearDis”

([Blue] key) on the Stylus Alarm screen.

Threshold Setup screen

3 Specify the threshold.

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

No. 99MBB122A 6-27

 4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key to accept entered values.

TIP • To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead

of the [Enter/Menu] key.
Stylus Alarm screen
 The set values are enabled.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

Home screen
 A message is displayed when cumulative distance exceeds the
limit for the first time after measurement has been completed.

Home screen
 After the message disappears, the alarm indicator of the stylus
mark is displayed to indicate that cumulative distance has
exceeded the threshold.

TIP • To set the cumulative distance to 0, press the “ClearDis”

([Blue] key) on the Stylus Alarm screen.

6-28 No. 99MBB122A

 7 MODIFYING
MEASUREMENT
CONDITIONS
In this chapter, measurement conditions are set or modified
according to surface roughness parameters, degree of roughness,
conditions of the location measured, etc.

The SJ-210 is compatible with each of the following roughness standards: JIS1982,
JIS1994, JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, and VDA.

Referring to Chapter 18, “REFERENCE INFORMATION”, set up the measurement

conditions according to the roughness standard to be complied with.

■ About modifying the measurement conditions

Since measurement condition items to be set according to the standard are interrelated,
setting a condition may also determine some other relevant conditions within the SJ-210.

For some measurement conditions, some choices may not be available due to being fixed
for that standard, or because of other conditions.

For more information on the relationships between these measurement conditions, refer to
7.2, “Modifying the Roughness Standard” through 7.11, “Modifying the Measuring Range”.

No. 99MBB122A 7-1

 7.1 Measurement Condition Screens Guide
■ Screens guide
1 2 3Measurement

Conditions
4
Measurement Conditions
Home screen Main Menu screen Menu screen screen

[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

Shortcut [Red] Select items

[Esc/Guide]
5 [Enter/Menu]

Roughness Standard Setup screen Evaluation Profile Setup screen Parameter Setup screen Filter Setup screen

Refer to 7.2 Refer to 7.3 Refer to 7.4 Refer to 7.5

Cutoff Value (λc) Setup screen Cutoff Value (λs) Setup screen Interval Setup screen Pre-travel/Post-travel Setup screen

Refer to 7.6 Refer to 7.6 Refer to 7.7, 7.8 Refer to 7.9

Traversing Speed Setup screen Measurement Range Setup screen

Refer to 7.10 Refer to 7.11

7-2 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen

Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Meas. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions
Menu screen
3 Select “Setting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • You can access the measurement conditions setup screen directly from the home
screen by pressing the shortcut [Red] key.

Home screen Measurement Conditions screen

No. 99MBB122A 7-3

7.2 Modifying the Roughness Standard
The SJ-210 is compatible with each of the following roughness standards: JIS1982,
JIS1994, JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, and VDA.

TIP • The currently specified roughness standard is indicated on the upper portion of the
Home screen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Standard” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Roughness Standard Setup screen

2 Select a roughness standard compatible with the target surface with
the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected roughness standard is displayed on the
Measurement Conditions screen.

NOTE • Be careful when modifying the roughness standard, as

other measurement condition items may be automatically
modified as a result.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

7-4 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.3 Modifying the Evaluation Profile

You can modify the evaluation profile to match the target surface.

TIP • For definitions of the evaluation profile and filter, refer to 18.2, “Evaluation Profiles and
Filters”.

■ Standards and evaluation profiles

Profiles selectable according to the standard are displayed.

Roughness Evaluation profiles

standard
P R DF R-Motif
JIS1982 ○ ○ - -

JIS1994 - ○ - -

JIS2001 ○ ○ ○ ○

ISO1997 ○ ○ ○ ○

ANSI - ○ - -

VDA ○ ○ ○ -

Free ○ ○ ○ ○

No. 99MBB122A 7-5

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Profile” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Evaluation Profile Setup screen

2 Select an evaluation profile compatible with the target surface with the
[ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected evaluation profile is displayed on the Measurement
Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

7-6 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.4 Modifying Display Parameters

You can set, calculate, and display evaluation parameters.

TIP • For more details about modifying display parameters, refer to 8.2, “Selecting the
Displayed Parameters (Parameter Customization)”.

No. 99MBB122A 7-7

7.5 Modifying Profile Filters
Profile filters can be set to 2CR75, PC75, or GAUSS.

NOTE • Be careful when modifying the roughness standard, as the profile filter may be
automatically modified as a result.

■ Profile filters with roughness standards and evaluation profiles

Profile filters are automatically set according to the roughness standard and evaluation
profile selected, as tabulated below.

Roughness Evaluation profiles

Standard
P R DF R-Motif
JIS1982 NONE 2CR75 - -

JIS1994 - GAUSS - -

JIS2001 GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS

ISO1997 GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS

ANSI PC75
- - -
GAUSS

VDA (NONE*1)
GAUSS GAUSS -
GAUSS

Free (NONE*1) (NONE*1)

2CR75
2CR75 2CR75
PC75 GAUSS
PC75 PC75
GAUSS
GAUSS GAUSS

*1: When “λs” is set to “NONE”.

Profile filters can be modified as necessary by following the procedure explained on the
following page.

TIP • For information on the properties of profile filters, refer to 18.2.2, “Filters”.

7-8 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Filter” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Filter Setup screen

2 Select a profile filter compatible with the target surface with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ]
keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected filter is displayed on the Measurement Conditions
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-9

7.6 Modifying Items Related to Cut-off
Items related to cut-off that can be modified include the cut-off value (λc, λs),
measurement sampling length (ℓp, ℓ), and upper limit length (A).

NOTE • You can modify the related cut-off item from the Home screen by pressing the shortcut
[ ← ] key. Press the [ ← ] key to cycle through the available values.

Here an example is given for modifying the value of λc. Other items related to cut-off can
be modified using similar procedures.

■ Operating procedure (For modifying λc) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in
Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “λc” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Cutoff Value (λc) Setup screen

2 Select a cut-off value compatible with the target surface with the [ ↑ ]
[ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected cut-off value (λc) is displayed on the Measurement
Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

7-10 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ The relationship between the cut-off values (λc) and (λs)

When the evaluation profile is set to “R” or “DF” and a cut-off value is set for (λc), a value is
determined for (λs) as detailed below.

Evaluation Cut-off value (λc) Cut-off value (λs)

profiles Ǵm(Ǵin) Ǵm(Ǵin)
R 0.08(0.003) 2.5(100)*1, *2

0.25(0.01) 2.5(100)*1, *2

0.8(0.03) 2.5(100)*1, *2

2.5(0.1) 8(320)*1, *2

DF 0.08(0.003) 2.5(100)*3

0.25(0.01) 2.5(100)*3

0.8(0.03) 2.5(100)*3

2.5(0.1) 8(320)*3

*1: When the roughness standard used is “JIS1982” the cut-off value (λs) is set to
“NONE”.

*2: When the roughness standard used is “JIS1994”, “VDA”, or “Free” the cut-off value
(λs) can be set to “NONE”.

*3: When the roughness standard used is “VDA”, or “Free” the cut-off value (λs) can be
set to “NONE”.

No. 99MBB122A 7-11

■ The relationship between measurement sampling length and cut-off value (λs)

When “P” is selected for the evaluation profile, measurement sampling length is displayed
as a cut-off related item. The symbol used to represent measurement sampling length
changes according to the set roughness standard. When the roughness standards
“JIS2001”, “ISO1997”, “VDA”, or “Free” are selected, “ℓp” is displayed. When the
roughness standard “JIS1982” is selected, “ℓ” is displayed.

When the measurement sampling length is set, the cut-off value (λs) is set accordingly, as
detailed below.

Evaluation Measurement Cut-off value (λs)

profiles sampling length (ℓp, ℓ)
Ǵm(Ǵin)
Ǵm(Ǵin)
P 0.08(0.003) 2.5(100)*1, *2

0.25(0.01) 2.5(100)*1, *2

0.8(0.03) 2.5(100)*1, *2

2.5(0.1) 8(320)*1, *2

*1: When the roughness standard used is “VDA”, or “Free” the cut-off value (λs) can be
set to “NONE”.

*2: When the roughness standard used is “JIS1982” the cut-off value (λs) is set to
“NONE”.

7-12 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ The relationship between the upper limit length and cut-off value (λs)

When “R-Motif” is selected for the evaluation profile, upper limit length (A) is displayed as
a cut-off related item.

When the upper limit length is set, the cut-off value (λs) is set accordingly, as detailed
below.

Evaluation Upper limit Upper limit Cut-off value (λs)

profiles length (A) length (B) Ǵ㨙(Ǵin)
Ǵm(Ǵin)
R-Motif 0.02(0.001) 2.5(100)*1

0.1(0.004) 㧙 2.5(100)*1

0.5(0.02) 8(320)*1

*1: When the roughness standard used is “Free” the cut-off value (λs) can be set to
“NONE”.

*2: When W-Motif is selected, according to the setting for upper limit length (B), the value
for upper limit length (A) is set as in the table.

No. 99MBB122A 7-13

7.7 Modifying the Number of Sampling Lengths
With the SJ-210, the evaluation length (cut-off value x number of sampling lengths) is
derived from a number of sampling lengths 1-10 or an arbitrary length (“Opt Length”).
When the number of sampling lengths is set to “Opt Length”, the evaluation length can be
set to an arbitrary length.

NOTE • When the evaluation profile is set to “R-Motif”, the number of sampling lengths cannot
be set.

■ Evaluation profiles and the number of sampling lengths

When the evaluation profile is changed, the number of sampling lengths is set to the
following initial values. These values can be modified as necessary.

Evaluation profiles Number of sampling lengths

P 1

R 5

DF 5

R-Motif Designate arbitrary length

NOTE • When “Opt Length” is selected, the evaluation length can be set to an arbitrary length.
Refer to 7.8, “Setting the Evaluation Length to an Arbitrary Length” for details.

• When GO/NG judgment is based on the 16% rule, 7 or more sampling lengths are
required.
• For GO/NG judgement rules set with an arbitrary length, only the maximum value and
average are valid.

TIP • You can modify the number of sampling lengths from the Home screen by pressing the
shortcut [ → ] key. You can cycle through the available values. However, you cannot
modify an arbitrary length.

7-14 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “N” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Number of Sampling
Lengths Setup screen
2 Select a number of sampling lengths compatible with the target surface
with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected number of sampling lengths is displayed on the
Measurement Conditions screen.

TIP • When “Opt Length” is set, the evaluation length can be set
to an arbitrary length. For more information on setting the
arbitrary length, refer to 7.8, “Setting the Evaluation Length
to an Arbitrary Length”.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-15

7.8 Setting the Evaluation Length to an Arbitrary
Length
The SJ-210 is capable of setting the evaluation length to an arbitrary length in a range
between 0.30 mm to 16.00 mm (0.0118 in to 0.6299 in).

The evaluation length is the distance of the arbitrary length minus the pre-travel/post-travel
lengths.
When pre-travel/post-travel is set to “OFF”, the evaluation distance is equal to the arbitrary
length.
Arbitrary length
Approach travel Pre- Post-
0.5 mm (0.019 in) travel Evaluation length travel

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin

Setting an arbitrary length and the traversal length/evaluation length

NOTE • The setting range of an arbitrary evaluation length depends on the cutoff value and filter
settings. When performing measurement at an arbitrary evaluation length, set the length
after setting a cut-off value and a filter.
• Note that the procedure for setting the evaluation length to an arbitrary length differs
when “R-Motif” is selected as the evaluation profile. For information about the setting
procedure, refer to “■ Operating procedure (when a Motif evaluation profile (R-Motif) is
specified)” below.

TIP • For more information about the relationship between the evaluation profile and
pre-travel/post-travel, refer to 18.4, “Traversal Length”.
• When pre-travel/post-travel is set to “OFF”, pre-travel/post-travel is calculated with
overlapping data included.

7-16 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Evaluation length and cut-off values

The SJ-210 determines the possible range of evaluation lengths based on the set cut-off
value and filter when evaluation profiles “R” or “DF” are selected. When “R-Motif” is the
selected as the evaluation profile, the relationship between the upper limit length and
evaluation length is as follows.

Upper limit Evaluation length

length A
0.02 mm (0.001 in) 0.3 ≤ L ≤ 0.64 mm
(0.0118 ≤ L ≤ 0.0252 in)

0.1 mm (0.004 in) 0.65 ≤ L ≤ 3.2 mm

(0.0256 ≤ L ≤ 0.1260 in)

0.5 mm (0.02in) 3.3 ≤ L ≤ 16 mm

(0.1299 ≤ L ≤ 0.6299 in)

For evaluation profile P, L ≥ 0.3 mm (0.0118 in).

No. 99MBB122A 7-17

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “N” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Number of Sampling
Lengths Setup screen
2 Select “Opt Length” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Arbitrary Length Setup screen

3 Set an arbitrary evaluation length compatible with the target surface.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen
 The set arbitrary evaluation length is displayed on the
Measurement Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

7-18 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Operating procedure (when a Motif evaluation profile (R-Motif) is specified)

(Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Opt Length” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Number of Sampling
Lengths Setup screen
2 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Arbitrary Length Setup screen

3 Set an arbitrary evaluation length compatible with the target surface.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen
 The set arbitrary evaluation length is displayed on the
Measurement Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-19

7.9 Setting Pre-travel/Post-travel
Pre-travel/post-travel can be set to “OFF” for cases where evaluation profile “R” is
selected and the measured surface is extremely short, etc. By setting
pre-travel/post-travel to OFF, the traversal length can be reduced by as much as the
length of the pre-travel and post-travel lengths, thus making it possible to measure the
narrow surface.

The factory-set default of the pre-travel and post-travel is set to “ON”.

IMPORTANT • Set the pre-travel and post-travel to “ON” unless otherwise required. When pre-travel or
post-travel is set to OFF, very small errors may be introduced into the calculations due
to measurement differing from the standard.
• When the evaluation profile is “P”, “R-Motif”, and “λs” is set to “NONE”, the filter cannot
be calculated and as a result, pre-travel/post-travel is fixed as “OFF”.

TIP • For more information about the traversal length, refer to 18.4, “Traversal Length”.

7-20 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Pre/Post” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Pre-travel/Post-travel Setup screen

2 Select “ON” or “OFF” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected pre-travel/post-travel setting is displayed on the
Measurement Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-21

7.10 Modifying the Traversing Speed
The traversing speed can be modified according to settings such as cut-off value (λc) and
the upper limit length.

■ The cutoff value (sampling length) and the traversing speed

The traversing speed can be set according to the cutoff value (λc) and the upper limit
length as detailed in the table below.

Cutoff value A mm (in) Traversing speed

(sampling (for R-Motif) mm/s (in/s)
length)
mm (in)
0.08 (0.003)  0.25, 0.5
(0.010, 0.020)

0.25 (0.01) 0.02 (0.001) 0.25, 0.5

(0.010, 0.020)

0.25, 0.5
0.8 (0.03) 0.10 (0.004)
(0.010, 0.020)

2.5 (0.1) 0.5 (0.020) 0.25, 0.5, 0.75

(0.010, 0.020, 0.030)

7-22 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “M-Speed” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Traversing Speed Setup screen

2 Select a cut-off value or evaluation length compatible with the
traversing speed with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected traversing speed is displayed on the Measurement
Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-23

7.11 Modifying the Measuring Range
The SJ-210 can perform measurement in one of the following measuring ranges: 25, 100,
360 m (1000, 4000, 14400 μin), and Auto. Use Auto range unless a range is specified: a
narrow range is sensitive and is apt to lead to an overrange.

TIP • When the measuring range is changed, the resolution also changes.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Measurement Conditions screen
1 Select “Range” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Range Setup screen

2 Select a measurement range compatible with the target surface with
the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Conditions screen

 The selected measuring range appears on the Measurement
Conditions screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• When the Measurement Conditions screen has been
accessed using the shortcut [Red] key, pressing the
[Esc/Guide] key once returns you to the Home screen.

7-24 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.12 Reprocessing Calculation Results

After measurement, measurement conditions can be changed, and the result is
recalculated.

The SJ-210 has a function to recalculate the measured data after performing a roughness
measurement by modifying the measurement conditions. When this recalculation function
is on, measurement data is recalculated and displayed based on the modified
measurement conditions.

■ Measurement conditions that can be modified for recalculation

The SJ-210 can perform recalculation after the modification of the following measurement
conditions.

࡮Roughness standard ࡮Evaluation profile

࡮Filter ࡮Number of sampling lengths (reduction)

࡮Parameters ࡮GO/NG judgment

NOTE • When the cut-off value or arbitrary length is modified and the sample pitch and data
point conditions do not match, recalculation may not be possible.
• The recalculation function cannot be used when the number of sampling lengths has
been increased, for example from “1” to “3”.
• When pre-travel/post-travel is set to “ON” from “OFF”, recalculation may be unavailable.
• When the filter or evaluation profile is modified and pre-travel/post-travel conditions do
not match, recalculation may not be possible.

No. 99MBB122A 7-25

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

1 After a roughness measurement, measurement conditions can be

modified while the calculation result is being displayed.
Measurement Conditions screen
2 Press the “Re-Calc.” ([Blue] key) on the Measurement Conditions
screen.

Home screen
 A message indicating the progress of recalculation is displayed.
After recalculation has been completed, the Home screen is
displayed. The recalculated measurement data is displayed on the
Home screen.

7-26 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.13 Saving/Loading/Deleting/Renaming Measurement

Conditions
The SJ-210 can save up to 10 measurement conditions onto the internal memory, or up to
500 onto the memory card (optional).
Saved measurement condition files can also be deleted or renamed.

IMPORTANT • A microSD card is used as the memory card.

microSDTM is the registered trademark of the SD Association.
A microSD Logo is the registered trademark.
In parts of this manual, “microSDTM card” is described as “microSD card” or “memory
card”. While designed to comply with existing standards, due to standards changes or
additions, or the non-support of SPI mode, etc, some microSD cards may not be
supported. Use the SD card designated by Mitutoyo (Part No. 12AAL069).
• Before use, the memory card must be formatted using the SJ-210. The memory card
may not function properly when formatted in a device other than the SJ-210. For
information about formatting the memory card, refer to 10.10.1, “Formatting the memory
card”.
• Connect the AC adapter to prevent power to the instrument from being interrupted
during operation.
• When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When operations
are performed when the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off during operation.

No. 99MBB122A 7-27

7.13.1 Measurement condition management screens guide
■ Screens guide
1 2 3
Measurement Conditions
Home screen Main Menu screen Menu screen

[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

Select items
[Esc/Guide]
[Enter/Menu]
4
Measurement Condition Measurement Condition Measurement Condition File
Load Select screen Deletion Select screen Rename Selection screen

Refer to 7.13.3 Refer to 7.13.4 Refer to 7.13.5

7-28 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions Menu screen

Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Meas. Condition” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 7-29

7.13.2 Saving measurement conditions
A set of measurement conditions can be saved in the internal memory, or on the optional
memory card.

IMPORTANT • A new memory card must be formatted with the SJ-210 before it can be used. The
memory card may not function properly when formatted in a device other than the
SJ-210. For information about formatting the memory card, refer to 10.10.1, “Formatting
the memory card”.
• When the built-in battery is completely depleted, or the built-in battery switch is set to
OFF, any measurement conditions saved to the internal memory is lost. It is
recommended to make periodic backups to the memory card. Refer to 10.10.5,
“Backing up the memory card and restoring backup data” for more information.
• When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. If measurement
conditions are saved when the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off while the
data is being saved.

■ Operating procedure (saving to the internal memory) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions
screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

1 Set the measurement conditions.

Measurement Conditions screen
2 On the Measurement Conditions screen, press the “Save” ([Red] key).

Measurement Condition
Save Location screen
3 Select “Direct” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

7-30 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

Internal Memory Save screen 4 Select a save number with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Save New screen

5 Enter a name for the measurement conditions file.

TIP • A name is automatically generated and displayed, but it

can be changed as required. The name can consist of
alphanumeric characters, “-” (hyphen), and “_”
(underscore). Up to 8 characters can be used.
• The name is cleared when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

6 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Internal Memory Save screen
 The measurement conditions are saved to the internal memory.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-31

■ Operating procedure (saving to the memory card) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions
screen” in Section 7.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

1 Set the measurement conditions.

Measurement Conditions screen
2 On the Measurement Conditions screen, press the “Save” ([Red] key).

Measurement Condition
Save Location screen
3 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Save screen

4 Select “Save New” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

TIP • When overwriting measurement conditions on the memory

card, select the measurement conditions and press the
[Enter/Menu] key. Press the [Enter/Menu] key when the
message is displayed on the screen.
• By searching for measurement conditions to overwrite, you
can narrow down applicable conditions. To search, press
the “Search” ([Red] key) and enter a keyword. When the
[Enter/Menu] key is pressed, measurement conditions that
include the keyword are displayed.

7-32 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS
Save New screen
5 Enter a name for the measurement conditions file.

TIP • A name is automatically generated and displayed, but it

can be changed as required. The name can consist of
alphanumeric characters, “-” (hyphen), and “_”
(underscore). Up to 8 characters can be used.
• The name is cleared when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

6 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Save screen
 The measurement conditions are saved to the memory card.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 7-33

7.13.3 Loading measurement conditions
You can load measurement conditions that have been saved to either the internal memory
or the memory card (optional).

To load measurement conditions, first display the Measurement Conditions Read screen
from the Measurement Conditions Setup screen, then choose the read source (internal
memory or memory card). Then, you can choose a file, etc.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. If measurement
conditions are loaded while the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off while the
data is being read.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions Menu screen” in Section 7.13.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Conditions Menu
screen
1 Select “Read” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Condition
Load Select screen
2 Select the read source with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.
“Direct”: Internal memory
“Memory Card”: Memory card

Internal Memory Load screen

3 Select the measurement conditions to be loaded with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The Home screen is restored.

7-34 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.13.4 Deleting measurement conditions

You can delete saved measurement conditions from the internal memory or memory card.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. If measurement
conditions are deleted while the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off while the
data is being deleted.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions Menu screen” in Section 7.13.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Conditions Menu
screen
1 Select “Delete” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Condition
Deletion Select screen
2 Select the save location that has the measurement conditions you
want to delete with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
“Direct”: internal memory
“Memory Card”: memory card

Internal Memory Deletion screen

3 Select the measurement conditions to delete with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 7-35

 4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.
Internal Memory Deletion screen
 The selected measurement conditions are deleted. For the internal
memory, the deleted location is displayed as “ ”.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

7-36 No. 99MBB122A

 7. MODIFYING MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

7.13.5 Renaming saved measurement conditions

You can rename measurement conditions saved in the internal memory or on the memory
card.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. If measurement
conditions are renamed while the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off while the
data is being renamed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Conditions Menu screen” in Section 7.13.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Conditions
Menu screen
1 Select “File Rename” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Condition File

Rename Selection screen
2 Select the save location that has the measurement conditions you
want to rename with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
“Direct”: internal memory
“Memory Card”: memory card

File Rename screen

3 Select the measurement conditions file name to be modified with the
[ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 7-37

File Rename screen
4 Rename the file.

TIP • For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

Internal Memory File 5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Rename screen
 The entered file name is displayed.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

7-38 No. 99MBB122A

 8 MODIFYING PARAMETERS
You can set parameters, parameter details, and GO/NG judgment.

8.1 Parameter Modification Screens Guide

■ Screens guide

1 2 3 4
Home screen Main Menu screen Parameter Setup screen Submenu screen

[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu] [Red]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

Item selection
[Esc/Guide]
5 [Enter/Menu]

GO/NG Judgment Rule Setting Details Selection

Setup screen screen

Refer to 8.3 Refer to 8.4

No. 99MBB122A 8-1

■ Accessing the Submenu screen
Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Parameters” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Parameter Setup screen

3 Press the “Submenu” ([Red] key).

TIP • To select parameters individually, select them on this

screen without proceeding to the submenu.

Submenu screen

8-2 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

8.2 Selecting the Displayed Parameters (Parameter

Customization)
Parameter customization functions can be used to set what is calculated and displayed.

8.2.1 Customizing parameters

■ Overview of the parameter customization function

The instrument is initially set at the factory to calculate and display the most commonly
used parameters. For other parameters, you can use the parameter customization function
to specify their calculation and display settings.
By calculating and displaying only specified parameters, the time required to calculate
measurement results is shortened, and the key operations for switching parameter display,
etc. can be simplified.
Also, parameters can be selected or deselected all at once.

TIP • The definition of each parameter is given in 18.5, “Definitions of the SJ-210 Roughness
Parameters”.
• When the Sm, Pc, or Ppi parameter is selected, the height of the count level must also
be set. Refer to 8.4.1, “Setting calculation conditions when Sm, Pc, Ppi or Rc is
selected” for setting procedure details.
• When the HSC parameter is selected, the height of the count level must also be set.
Refer to 8.4.2, “Setting calculation conditions when HSC is selected” for setting
procedure details.
• When the mr parameter is selected, the number of sections, reference line, and slice
level must also be set. Refer to 8.4.3, “Setting calculation conditions when mr is
selected” for setting procedure details.
• When the mr[c] parameter is selected, the slice level must also be set. Refer to 8.4.4,
“Setting calculation conditions when mr[c] (tp for ANSI) is selected” for setting
procedure details.
• When the δc parameter is selected, the reference line and slice level must also be set.
Refer to 8.4.5, “Setting calculation conditions when δc (Htp for ANSI) is selected” for
setting procedure details.

No. 99MBB122A 8-3

■ Parameters and roughness standards/evaluation profiles
Parameters can be selected and saved for each roughness standard and evaluation profile.
When a roughness standard or evaluation profile is set, predetermined parameters are
recalled.

Roughness Evaluation Parameter

standard profile
JIS1982 P Rz, Rmax

R Ra

JIS1994 R Ra, Rz, Ry, Pc, Sm, S, mr(c)

JIS2001 P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, PzJIS, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc,
Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, RzJIS, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, RzJIS, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

ISO1997 P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, Pz1max, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c),
Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rz1max, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rz1max, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

W-Motif W, Wx, AW, Wte

ANSI R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, RPc, RSm, Rmax, RΔa, RΔq, tp, Htp,
Rpm

VDA P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, Pmax, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc,
Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rmax, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rmax, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c),
Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

8-4 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

Roughness Evaluation Parameter

standard profile
Free P Pa, Pq, Pz, Py, Pp, Pv, Pt, P3z, Psk, Pku, Pc, PPc, PSm, S, HSC, PzJIS,
Pppi, PΔa, PΔq, Plr, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2, Vo,
Ppm

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Ry, Rp, Rv, Rt, R3z, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RPc, RSm, S, HSC, RzJIS,
Rppi, RΔa, RΔq, Rlr, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2,
Vo, Rpm

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Ry, Rp, Rv, Rt, R3z, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RPc, RSm, S, HSC, RzJIS,
Rppi, RΔa, RΔq, Rlr, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2,
Vo, Rpm

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

■ Operating procedure (when individual parameters are selected) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen”
in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Parameter Setup screen
1 Check that the roughness standard and the evaluation profile are
selected for the parameters to be customized.
When the roughness standard or evaluation profile differs, refer to 7.2,
“Modifying the Roughness Standard” or 7.3, “Modifying the Evaluation
Profile”, and change the roughness standard or evaluation profile
accordingly.

Parameter Setup screen

2 Set the parameters.
Select the parameter to be calculated and displayed with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ]
keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 8-5

 Parameter Setup screen
 The set parameter's name turns red, and the background turns light
blue.

Parameter Setup screen

3 Cancel a parameter setting.
Select the parameter to be canceled with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.

Parameter Setup screen

 The canceled parameter's name turns dark blue, and the
background turns white.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set all the parameters you wish to calculate and
display.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

8-6 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

■ Operating procedure (selecting all parameters at once) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in
Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Home screen
1 Check that the roughness standard and evaluation profile are selected
for the parameters to be customized.
When the roughness standard or evaluation profile differs, refer to 7.2,
“Modifying the Roughness Standard” or 7.3, “Modifying the Evaluation
Profile”, and change the roughness standard or evaluation profile
accordingly.

Parameter Setup screen

2 Press the “Submenu” ([Red] key).

Submenu screen
3 Select “Set All” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Parameter Setup screen

 All the parameter's names turn red, and the background turns light
blue.
All items are displayed as being set.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 8-7

■ Operating procedure (deselecting all parameters at once) (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in
Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Parameter Setup screen
1 Press the “Submenu” ([Red] key).

Submenu screen
2 Select “Cancel All” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Parameter Setup screen

 All the parameter's names turn dark blue, and the background turns
white.
All items are displayed as being deselected.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

8-8 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

8.3 Setting the GO/NG Judgment Function

The SJ-210 has a GO/NG judgment function. By using this function, a Go/No-go judgment
can be made for the measured surface roughness of a specimen.

One of 3 patterns, Mean, 16%, or Max, can be selected as the verification rule of the
GO/NG judgment function.

For the SJ-210, the GO/NG judgment function can be set to the selected parameters.

■ GO/NG judgment result display

When the GO/NG judgment function is used, the measurement data is compared with its
upper and lower tolerance limits. When the measurement falls outside the limits, the display
color of the measurement result changes. When the measurement is within tolerance limits,
the “OK” sign appears to the right of the parameter name. When the measurement exceeds
the upper limit, the “+NG” sign appears to the right of the parameter name, and the
displayed measurement result turns red. When the measurement falls below the lower limit,
the “-NG” sign appears to the right of the parameter name, and the displayed measurement
result turns blue.

GO/NG judgment result (within limit, above upper limit, below lower limit)

NOTE • When the upper or lower limit is set to 0, the GO/NG judgment function based on the
limits is turned off. The upper limit and lower limit can be set individually. Therefore, it is
possible to individually disable the GO/NG judgment with the upper/lower limits.

No. 99MBB122A 8-9

■ GO/NG judgment verification rules

The SJ-210 can set the verification rule of the GO/NG judgment function to the Mean rule,
16% rule, or Max rule.

IMPORTANT • The verification rules of the GO/NG judgment function apply only to parameters for
which a value for each sampling length within the evaluation range has been obtained
and an arithmetic mean determined.
• When the number of sampling lengths is 1 or a parameter value is determined by the
entire sampling length, the following rule is applied irrespective of any verification rule.
The result is No-Go when parameter value > upper limit value or parameter value <
lower limit value.

Mean rule: This rule decides Go or No-Go judgment through size comparison between
a parameter value, determined as an arithmetic mean of measurements
obtained for each sampling length within the evaluation range, and the
upper/lower limit value.

16% rule: The percentage of No-Go results for evaluation length measurement values
is obtained by individually judging the measurement value for each
sampling length against the upper/lower limit values. When the obtained
percentage of No-Go sampling lengths is below 16%, the overall judgment
is Go, and when the obtained percentage of No-Go sampling lengths is over
16%, the overall judgment is No-Go.
The 16% rule gives the same results as the Max rule when less than 6
sampling lengths are evaluated.

Max rule: The obtained measurement values of each evaluation length are compared
against the upper and lower limit values, and when any evaluation length
value exceeds the upper limit or falls below the lower limit, a No-Go
judgment is made.

8-10 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “Tol.Judge” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

GO/NG Judgment Rule 2 Set the judgment rules.

Setup screen
a Select “JudgeRules” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Judgment Rule Setup screen

b Select “JudgeRules” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 8-11

 3 Set which parameters use GO/NG judgment.
To set GO/NG judgment for each parameter, follow the below
GO/NG Judgment Rule procedure.
Setup screen
a Select a parameter for GO/NG judgment with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.

GO/NG Judgment Rule

Setup screen
 The name of the set parameter turns red.

GO/NG Judgment Rule

Setup screen
b To set the upper limit value, press the “Up Limit” ([Red] key).

8-12 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS
Upper Limit Setup screen
c Set the upper limit value.
When the value is set, press the [Enter/Menu] key.

NOTE • When the upper limit is set to 0, GO/NG judgment by the

upper limit is disabled.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of a decimal point, place the cursor
at the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

GO/NG Judgment Rule
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.
Setup screen
d To set the lower limit value, press the “LowLimit” ([Blue] key).

Lower Limit Setup screen

e Set the lower limit value.
When the value is set, press the [Enter/Menu] key.

NOTE • When the lower limit is set to 0, GO/NG judgment by the

lower limit is disabled.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.
GO/NG Judgment Rule
Setup screen
 The set GO/NG judgment rule and the set upper and lower limit
values are displayed on the GO/NG Judgment Rule Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 8-13

8.4 Parameter Detail Settings
Calculation conditions can be set as necessary for parameters such as Sm, Pc, Ppi, Rc,
HSC, etc.

8.4.1 Setting calculation conditions when Sm, Pc, Ppi, or Rc is selected

When the “Sm”, “Pc”, or “Ppi” parameter is selected, the height of the count level, a
calculation condition, must be set. Profile Element restriction definition settings can also be
made.

Profile Element restriction definition (when the height of the count level is 10%)

(1) Zp / Zv 㧦 Zp>Zmin, Zv>Zmin Zmin=10% of Rz

Peak Peak

Evaluation profiles

Mean line
10% of Rz

Valley

Valley

(2) Zt 㧦 Zt>Zmin Zmin=10% of Rz

Peak
Peak

Evaluation profiles
10% of Rz
or more Peak
Mean line

Valley
Valley

Valley

8-14 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen

3 Select a Profile Element restriction definition, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen

 The background of the selected Profile Element restriction turns
blue.

No. 99MBB122A 8-15

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen
4 Select the measurement type for the height of the count level, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen

 The background of the selected measurement type turns blue.
The measurement type for the height of the count level is switched
to the predetermined type.

5 Set the height of the count level.

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen
a Select “Count Level” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Count Level Setup screen

b Input the height of the count level.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 99.9 %
0.0 to 999.9m (9999.9 in)

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

8-16 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Setup screen
 The set height of the count level is displayed on the Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc
Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 8-17

8.4.2 Setting calculation conditions when HSC is selected
When the “HSC” parameter is selected, the height of the count level, a calculation condition,
must be set.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “HSC” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

HSC Setup screen

3 Select the reference for the height of the count level, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.
“Peak”: Set from the highest peak of the evaluation profile
“Base”: Set from the mean line of the evaluation profile

HSC Setup screen

 The background of the selected reference of the height of the count
level turns blue.

8-18 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

HSC Setup screen

4 Select the measurement type for the height of the count level, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.

HSC Setup screen

 The background of the selected measurement type turns blue.
The set measurement type for the height of the count level is
switched to the predetermined type.

5 Setting the height of the count level.

HSC Setup screen
a Select “Count Level” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Count Level Setup screen

b Input the height of the slice level.
The input range is as follows:
Peak reference: 0.0 to 99.9%/0.0 to 999.9m (9999.99 in)
Base reference: -50% to +50%/-999.9 to +999.9m (+/-9999.99 in)

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

No. 99MBB122A 8-19

 c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.
HSC Setup screen
 The set height of the count level is displayed on the HSC Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

8-20 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

8.4.3 Setting calculation conditions when mr is selected.

When the parameter “mr” is selected, the number of sections, reference line, and slice level
must also be set as calculation conditions.

TIP • The calculation results for parameter “mr” are displayed according to the set number of
sections (N).
• Parameters “mr(Rz)” and “mr(Rt)” can be set when the roughness standard is “Free”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “mr” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

3 Set the number of sections.

mr Setup screen
a Use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys to select “Slice points”.

No. 99MBB122A 8-21

 mr Setup screen
b Press the [Enter/Menu] key to set the number of sections.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings
from “1” to “12”.

4 Set the reference line.

mr Setup screen
a Select “Reference Line” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Reference Line Setup screen

b Input the reference line.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 99.9 %

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

mr Setup screen
 The set reference line is displayed on the mr Setup screen.

8-22 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

5 Set the slice depth.

mr Setup screen
a Select “Slice depth” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Slice Depth Setup screen

b Input the slice depth.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 999.9 m (9999.99 in)

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

mr Setup screen
 The set slice depth is displayed on the mr Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 8-23

8.4.4 Setting calculation conditions when mr[c] (tp for ANSI) is selected
When the parameter “mr(c)” (“tp” for ANSI) is selected, the slice level must also be set as a
calculation condition.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “mr(c)” (“tp” for ANSI) with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

mr(c) Setup screen

3 Select the reference for the slice level, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
“Peak”: Set from the highest peak of the evaluation profile
“Base”: Set from the mean line of the evaluation profile

mr(c) Setup screen

 The background of the selected slice level reference turns blue.

8-24 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS
mr(c) Setup screen
4 Select the measurement type for the slice level, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

mr(c) Setup screen

 The background of the selected measurement type turns blue.
The set measurement type for the slice level switches.

5 Set the number of sections.

mr(c) Setup screen
a Use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys to select “Slice points”.

mr(c) Setup screen

b Press the [Enter/Menu] key to set the number of sections.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available number
of slice points “1” or “2”.

No. 99MBB122A 8-25

 6 Set the slice level.
When “slice points” is set to “2”, two slice levels can be set.
mr(c) Setup screen
a Select “Slice level” “1” or “2” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Slice Level Setup screen

b Input the slice level.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 99.9 %
0.0 to 999.9m (9999.99 in)

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

mr(c) Setup screen
 The set slice level is displayed on the setup screen for mr(c) (tp for
ANSI).

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

8-26 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

8.4.5 Setting calculation conditions when δc (Htp for ANSI) is selected

When the parameter “δc” (“Htp” for ANSI) is selected, the slice level and reference line must
also be set as calculation conditions.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “δc” (“Htp” for ANSI) with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

3 Set the number of sections.

δc Setup screen
a Use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys to select “Slice points”.

No. 99MBB122A 8-27

δc Setup screen
b Press the [Enter/Menu] key to set the number of sections.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available number
of slice points from “1” to “3”.

4 Set as many numbers of reference lines as the set number of sections.

Settings that cannot be made have a gray background.
δc Setup screen
a Use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys to select the parameters for a slice point.

δc Setup screen
b Select the reference line with the [←] [→] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Reference Line Setup screen

c Input the reference line.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 99.9%

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

8-28 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

d Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

δc Setup screen
 The set reference line is displayed on the δc (Htp for ANSI) setup
screen.

5 The number of slice levels to set matches the number of set slice points.
Settings that cannot be made have a gray background.
δc Setup screen
a Use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys to select the parameters for a slice point.

δc Setup screen
b Select the slice level with the [←] [→] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Slice Level Setup screen

c Input the slice level.
The input range is as follows:
0.0 to 999.9 m (9999.99 in)

TIP • The value is set to 0 when the “AC” ([Blue] key) is pressed.
• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,
“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

No. 99MBB122A 8-29

 d Press the [Enter/Menu] key.
δc Setup screen
 The set slice level is displayed on the δc (Htp for ANSI) setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

8-30 No. 99MBB122A

 8. MODIFYING PARAMETERS

8.4.6 Setting calculation conditions when a profile motif (R-Motif) is selected

The SJ-210 can use one of the following compliant motif connection methods when the
“R-Motif” profile motifs are selected: The method described in the body of ISO 12085, and
the method described in ISO 12085 Annex A.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Submenu screen” in Section 8.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu   

Submenu screen
1 Select “DetailsSetting” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Setting Details Selection screen

2 Select “AnnexA” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys.

Setting Details Selection screen

3 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 8-31

MEMO

8-32 No. 99MBB122A

 9 MEASUREMENT
RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/
DELETE/RENAME)
The SJ-210 can save the measurement conditions and results. It
also can load the saved data.

The SJ-210 can save the measurement conditions and results in files and load the saved
data. It also can delete and rename the files.
Note that a memory card (optional) is necessary for saving/loading the measurement
conditions and results.
Using a memory card, the SJ-210 can save/load the measurement conditions up to 500
cases and the measurement results up to 10,000 cases of measurements.

This section explains the outline and procedures of loading/saving/deleting/renaming the

measurement conditions and results.

IMPORTANT • A microSD card is used as the memory card.

microSDTM is the registered trademark of the SD Association.
A microSD Logo is the registered trademark.
In some parts of this manual, “microSDTM card” is described as “microSD card” or
“memory card”. While designed to comply with existing standards, due to standards
changes or additions, or the non-support of SPI mode, etc, some microSD cards may
not be supported. Use the SD card designated by Mitutoyo (Part No. 12AAL069).

• Before use, the memory card must be formatted using the SJ-210. The memory card
may not function properly when formatted in a device other than the SJ-210. For
information about formatting the memory card, refer to 10.10.1, “Formatting the memory
card”.
• Connect the AC adapter to prevent power to the instrument from being interrupted while
making settings.
• When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When operations
are performed while the battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off during operation.

No. 99MBB122A 9-1




9.1 Data To Be Saved and Storage Media

■ Data to save/load and its media

Data saving and loading is outlined below, where data is divided into two groups according
to data handling.

Data group Stored contents Storage media

Measurement Measurement conditions Internal memory (10 files max.),
conditions or Memory card (500 files max.)

Measured Measured profile data, Internal memory (1 file of the latest

data calculation results measurement result),
or Memory card (10,000 files max.)

NOTE • When data is loaded, the existing SJ-210 main unit setup is overwritten with the above
described “storage contents” that are loaded together.

9.1.1 Handling the memory card

A memory card can be inserted in the slot on the rear side of the SJ-210.
Insert the memory card following the procedures below.

■ Inserting the memory card

IMPORTANT • Insert the memory card straightforward correctly fitting in the memory card slot guide.
Otherwise the connector pins at the recess may be damaged.

• Insert the memory card with the pin assignment side facing up.
• Insert or remove the memory card while the power of the SJ-210 is off.

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕
Rear cover

Detaching the rear cover

9-2 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

3 Insert the memory card, with the pin assignment side facing up, into the slot as far as
possible.

IMPORTANT
Insert the memory card with the
pin assignment side facing up.

Inserting the memory card

4 Fit the rear cover to the hollow of the rear of the display unit in the direction indicated
by the arrow (1).

5 Push the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and attach it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕 Rear cover

Attaching the rear cover

■ Removing the memory card

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕
Rear cover
Detaching the rear cover

No. 99MBB122A 9-3




3 Push the memory card.

 The memory card pops part of the way out of the slot.

4 Pull the memory card the rest of the way out of the slot.

5 Fit the rear cover to the hollow of the rear of the display unit in the direction indicated
by the arrow (1).

6 Push the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and attach it.

㧔2㧕

㧔1㧕 Rear cover

Attaching the rear cover

9-4 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

9.1.2 Memory card folder construction
When SJ-210 data is saved on the memory card, the data is saved in the following folders.

■ Memory Card Folder Construction

The folder construction in the memory card is explained below.

Folder Meaning

10COND Used for backup of the 10 conditions to be saved in the internal memory.
This folder functions as temporal storage to avoid the loss of the condition file
to be saved in the SJ-210. This is useful for such occasion as replacing the
built-in battery.

10DATA Used for the Save10 data.

BKUP Used for backup of the basic information of the card.

COND Used to save/load the measurement conditions.

Maximum number of files to be saved: 500 files

DATA Used to save the measurement results.

The DATA folder consists of 20 folders. The results of 500 measurements can
FOL-1 to 20 be saved in each of 20 folders. The resulting data can be loaded only by the
SJ-210.
Maximum number of files to be saved: 10,000 files

IMG Used to save the displayed contents on screens in the BMP file format when
the hardcopy function is enabled.
Maximum number of files to be saved: 500 files

USER Used to save the measurement results and calculation results in a text file.
The USER folder consists of 20 folders. The results in 500 text files can be
FOL-1 to 20 saved in each of 20 folders. The data saved in a text file can be registered
using text editor on PCs, and therefore, are easy to access for users.

NOTE • The data files in the memory card that can be registered (and deleted) on PCs using
card readers on the market are limited to graphic data in the “IMG” folder and text files in
“USER” folder. Do not modify/delete the files in the other folders. Do not modify/delete
the folders. It causes a card access error.
• When the text files in the “USER” folder are modified on a PC, the data cannot be
loaded properly using communication software.

TIP • For information about changing the names of folders on a memory card and changing
the main folder, refer to 9.3, “File Management”.

No. 99MBB122A 9-5




9.1.3 Data saved on the memory card

■ Name of files created automatically

Sequence No. (000 - 999)

Date (2 digits)

A: January G: July
B: February H: August
Last 2 digits of the year C: March I: September
D: April J: October
E: May K: November
F: June L: December

Rule for names of automatically created files

■ Content of the text file

The contents of the text file are explained below using an example where the text file is
saved under the default conditions.

Stored contents Description

// Header The header part

Version;SJ-210 V.1.000 Model name, software version
Date;2009/10/01 Date of measurement
Mode;ALL ALL: all data, RES: calculation results

// Condition Measurement conditions

Standard;ISO1997 Measurement standard
Profile;R Profiles
Filter;GAUSS Filters
Lc;0.8;mm λc
Ls;2.5;um λs
N;5 Number of sampling lengths
Pre_Length;ON Pre-travel and post-travel setting
Speed;0.5 Traversing speed
Range;AUTO Measurement range
GO/NG;Average GO/NG judgment

Pitch;0.5;um Sampling Pitch

// CalcResult Calculation results

Ra;2.936;um;; Parameter name; calculation results; unit; parameter
Rq;3.263;um;; detail settings;
Rz;9.314;um;; GO/NG judgment

// CalcData Measurement results

8000 Number of files
Z
4.3095 Data
4.2304

4.1510
4.0703


9-6 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)


■ Graphic files

The graphic data saved in the BMP file format can be registered on PCs as graphic data
as it is.

No. 99MBB122A 9-7




9.2 Measurement Results Screen Guide

■ Screens guide

2 3
Measurement Result
Home screen Main Menu screen Menu screen

[Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide]

Select items
[Esc/Guide]
4 [Enter/Menu]

Loading Folder Select Save Folder Select Delete Folder Select File Rename Folder
screen screen screen Select screen

Refer to 9.4 Refer to 9.5 Refer to 9.6 Refer to 9.7

9-8 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen
Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Measured Data” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 9-9




9.3 File Management

It is possible to modify the folder name of the internal memory and change the folder
assignment as the main folder as desired.

9.3.1 Modifying folder names

It is possible to modify the name of the folder to which the measurement results are saved.
Folder names can be modified on the following screens: Load Folder Select screen, Save
Folder Select screen, Delete Folder Select screen, and File Rename Folder Select Screen.
The operating procedures are explained using an example of the Load Folder Select
screen. The operating procedures are the same for the other screens.

NOTE • The folder name cannot include [ * ], [ ¥ ], and [ . ].

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Read” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Loading Folder Select screen

2 Select the desired folder of which name is to be modified with the [ ↑ ]
[ ↓ ] keys, and press the “Rename” ([Red] key).

9-10 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

Rename Folder screen
3 Enter the folder name.

TIP • For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

Loading Folder Select screen

 The folder name is modified as entered.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 9-11




9.3.2 Specifying the main folder

After the measurement, press the [POWER/DATA] key to save the measurement results in
the main folder. A specific folder can be selected as this main folder.
The main folder can be specified on the following screens: Load Folder Select screen,
Save Folder Select screen, Delete Folder Select screen, and File Rename Folder Select
screen.
The operating procedures are explained using an example of the Load Folder Select
screen. The operating procedures are the same for the other screens.

TIP • For information about setting the data output, refer to 10.3, “Data Output Settings”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Read” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Load Folder Select screen

2 Select the desired folder to be specified as the main folder with the [ ↑ ]
[ ↓ ] keys, and press the “Sw. Main” ([Blue] key).

Load Folder Select screen

 “*” is added before the folder name.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

9-12 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)


9.4 Loading Measurement Results

The saved measurement results on the memory card can be loaded.
When the saved measurement results are loaded, the existing SJ-210 internal memory is
overwritten with the saved measurement results, and the calculation results are displayed.
The following operations can be performed for the loaded results just as for the results
obtained through the measurement: recalculating the measurement results by modifying
the measurement conditions, printing data on the printer, resaving back to the memory
card.

IMPORTANT • By loading the measurement results, the measurement conditions of the SJ-210 are
modified to that when the measurement results are saved.
• When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When the
measurement results are loaded while the level of the battery remainder power is low,
the power of the SJ-210 may be turned off during loading the data.

9.4.1 Loading the saved measurement results

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Read” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Load Folder Select screen

2 Select the desired folder containing the measurement results to be
loaded with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • When the Save10 function is enabled, the results of the

latest 10 measurements are automatically saved in the
“Save10” folder. To load the results of the latest
measurement, select the “Read 10 Data”.
For information about the Save 10 function, refer to
10.10.4, “Setting the Save 10 Function”.

No. 99MBB122A 9-13




Measurement Result Load screen

3 Select the measurement results to be read with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The measurement results are loaded, and then the Home screen is
restored.

9-14 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

9.4.2 Searching for files to load
When the result data of several measurements are saved in one folder, search for the file
within the folder. It is a quick way to find the file to be loaded.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Read” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Load Folder Select screen

2 Select the desired folder containing the measurement results to be
loaded with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Load File Select screen

3 Press the “Search” ([Red] key).

Measurement Result Search screen

4 Enter the file name to be searched.

TIP • For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

No. 99MBB122A 9-15



Measurement Result Load screen
5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The relevant measurement results are found by searching with the

entered character.
To cancel searching, press the [Esc/Guide] key.

Measurement Result Load screen

6 Select the measurement results to be read with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The measurement results are loaded, and then the Home screen is
restored.

9-16 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)


9.5 Saving Measurement Results

The measurement results can be saved on the memory card.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When the
measurement results are saved while battery power is low, the SJ-210 may shut off
while the data is being saved.

NOTE • To load the saved measurement results with communication software, make sure to
save the measurement results in a text file format beforehand. Refer to 10.10.3, “Saving
text data to the memory card”.

9.5.1 Saving the measurement results newly

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Save” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Save Folder Select screen

2 Select the folder to which the measurement results are saved with the
[ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 9-17




Measurement Result Save screen 3 Select “Save New” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Measurement Result
Save New screen
4 Enter a file name.

TIP • For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

Measurement Result 5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Save screen
 The measurement results are saved in the file whose name was
entered in step 4.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

9-18 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

9.5.2 Overwriting the measurement results
■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Save” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Save Folder Select screen

2 Select the folder to which the measurement results are saved with the
[ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Result
Save screen
3 Select the measurement results to be overwritten with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • It is possible to search for the measurement results to be

overwritten. For more information about the searching
procedure, refer to 9.4.2, “Searching for files to load”.

4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

To cancel overwriting, press the [Esc/Guide] key.

 The measurement results are overwritten.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 9-19




9.6 Deleting Measurement Results

It is possible to delete the measurement results saved on the memory card.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When the
measurement results are deleted while the level of the battery remainder power is low,
the power of the SJ-210 may be turned off during deleting the data.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “Delete” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Delete Folder Select screen

2 Select the folder containing the measurement results to be deleted with
the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Result
Deletion screen
3 Select the measurement results to be deleted with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
To delete all the saved measurement data, press the “Del. All” ([Blue]
key).

NOTE • When deleting many data found by searching all at once, it

may take several minutes.

TIP • It is possible to search for the measurement results to be

deleted. For more information about the searching
procedure, refer to 9.4.2, “Searching for files to load”.

9-20 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)


Measurement Result 4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Deletion screen
 The selected measurement results are deleted.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 9-21




9.7 Renaming Measurement Results

It is possible to modify the file name of the measurement results saved on the memory
card.

IMPORTANT • When using the built-in battery, make sure it is sufficiently charged. When the file names
of the measurement results are modified while the level of the battery remainder power
is low, the power of the SJ-210 may be turned off during modifying the file names.

NOTE • The file name cannot include [ * ], [ ¥ ], and [ . ].

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Measurement Data Menu screen” in Section 9.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Measurement Result Menu screen
1 Select “File Rename” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

File Rename Folder Select screen

2 Select the folder containing the measurement results whose file name
to be modified with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Measurement Result File

Rename screen
3 Select the measurement results file name to be modified with the [ ↑ ]
[ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • It is possible to search for the measurement results whose

file names are to be modified. For more information about
the searching procedure, refer to 9.4.2, “Searching for files
to load”.

9-22 No. 99MBB122A


 9. MEASUREMENT RESULTS (LOAD/SAVE/DELET/RENAME)

File Rename screen
4 Enter a file name.

TIP • For information about character entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

Measurement Result File 5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Rename screen
 The file name entered in step 4 is displayed.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 9-23




MEMO

9-24 No. 99MBB122A


 10 OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT SETUP
Setting up the basic operating environment of this instrument allows
you to use its functions effectively.

You can set the following functions in the operating environment setup.

 Date/Time : Settings for date and time, and their display methods

 Data Output : Settings of functions assigned to the [POWER/DATA] key

 Select Language : Select the display language.

 Drive : Settings and calibration for the drive unit

 Switch Unit : Switches between millimeters and inches for the unit of
measurement (fixed to millimeters when the language is
Japanese).

 Decimal Point : Select a period or comma to use as the decimal point.

 Volume Adjustment : Adjust the volume of indicator sounds.

 Function Restriction : Restrict the settings of functions (password protection).

 Memory Card : Format or save to the memory card.

 Auto-sleep : Set the time and ON/OFF for the auto-sleep function.

 Self-timer : Set the time and ON/OFF for the self timer function.

 PC Communication : Set RS-232C communication conditions.

 Detector Position : Detector position confirmation screen (maintenance function)

 LCD/Key Test : Check the LCD display and key operation (maintenance function).

 Reset to Default : Reset the settings of instrument to factory default settings.

 Version : Confirm the version of the SJ-210's display unit

No. 99MBB122A 10-1

 10.1 Operating Environment Setup Screen Guide
■ Screens guide
1 2 3
Home screen Main Menu screen Operating Environment Setup menu

[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

Item Selection
[Esc/Guide]
4 [Red]

Date/Time screen Data Output Setup screen Language Selection screen Drive Unit Setup screen Unit Selection screen

Refer to 10.2 Refer to 10.3 Refer to 10.4 Refer to 10.5 Refer to 10.6
Decimal Point selection Function Restriction
screen Volume Adjustment screen Setup screen Memory Card Setup screen Auto-sleep Setup screen

Refer to 10.7 Refer to 10.8 Refer to 10.9 Refer to 10.10 Refer to 10.11
PC Communication Detector Position
Self-timer Setup screen Setup screen Display screen LCD/Key Test screen Version information

Refer to 10.12 Refer to 10.13 Refer to 10.14 Refer to 10.15 Refer to 10.17

10-2 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen

Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Set Environ.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-3

10.2 Setting the Date and Time
You can set the date and time on the SJ-210. This is useful for records management, as
the day and time are recorded as part of measurement data and conditions.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Date/Time” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Date/Time screen
2 Select “Year” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
“Mon/Date” and “Time” can be selected as well.

Date/Time Setup screen

3 Specify the date and time.

TIP • For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

10-4 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Date/Time screen
 The day and time are set.

TIP • To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead

of the [Enter/Menu] key.

Date/Time screen
5 Select “Format” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Date/Time Format Setup screen

6 Select a date format (order of day, month, year) with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ]
keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • YYYY is the year, MM the month, and DD the day.

• To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead

of the [Enter/Menu] key.

Date/Time screen
 The date format is set.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-5

10.3 Data Output Settings
The [POWER/DATA] key is assigned the below functions.

[POWER/DATA] key

Operation key ([POWER/DATA] key㧕

By pressing the [POWER/DATA] key, you can output the selected function's measurement
results.

SPC: You can output measurement results to a data processor.

A data processor (ex.: DP-1VR) must be connected in advance.

Printer: You can output measurement results to a printer.

Perform a communication check to set communication conditions.

Saving data: Measurement results can be saved on the memory card.

(The file name is automatically generated.)

Hard copy: The currently displayed screen image is saved as an image file to the
memory card. (The file name is automatically generated.)

10-6 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.3.1 Setting the data output to SPC

You can output calculation results from the SJ-210 to a DP-1VR when data output is set to
“SPC”.

With this setting, calculation results are output when the [POWER/DATA] key on the
SJ-210 or the [DATA] key on the DP-1VR is pressed.

NOTE • The factory default setting for data output is “SPC”.

TIP • For information of connecting the SJ-210 to a DP-1VR, and about SPC data output,
refer to 13.1, “SPC Data Output”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “SPC” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 10-7

10.3.2 Setting the data output to a printer

You can print out measurement results or conditions from the SJ-210 when data output is
set to “Printer”.

Printing commences when the [POWER/DATA] key is pressed.

There is also a function for automatic printing when a measurement is complete using the
SJ-210.

TIP • For information about connecting the SJ-210 to a printer, and about printing, refer to
13.2, “Printing to an External Printer”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

ironment Setup menu
screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Printer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

NOTE • The factory default setting for data output is “SPC”. When
using a printer for data output, make sure to change the
output setting to “Printer”.

Print Setup screen

3 Confirm the communication status with the printer.

TIP • For information about confirming the printer's

communication status, refer to 13.2.2, “Setting the printer
communication conditions”.

10-8 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

Print Setup screen

4 Select “Auto-print” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys.

5 Set the auto-print function to ON or OFF.

Auto-print is a function that automatically prints a measurement
result after a measurement is complete.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Sets the auto-print function to ON.
“OFF”: Sets the auto-print function to OFF.

6 Set the items to print and the print magnification as required.

NOTE • For information about print item setup, refer to 10.3.2.1,

“Setting the print items”.

• For information about setting the print magnification, refer

to 10.3.2.2, “Setting the print magnification”. Note that the
factory default setting for vertical and horizontal
magnification is “AUTO” (automatic optimal magnification).

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-9

10.3.2.1 Setting the print items

When printing output from the SJ-210, the following items can be printed.

 Measurement conditions

 Evaluation profiles

 Calculation results

 N (sampling lengths) result

 Tolerance limit value

 BAC

 ADC

For the SJ-210 these variables for printing are referred to as print items. Each print item
can be individually set for printing.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Printer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

10-10 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP
Print Setup screen
3 Select an item that you want to print with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.

Print Setup screen

 The selected items displayed as “ON” are printed.

4 Carry out step 3 for all items that you want to print.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-11

10.3.2.2 Setting the print magnification

The SJ-210 can change the vertical and horizontal magnification of a printed evaluation
profile.

■ Types of vertical and horizontal magnification

The following tables show the possible horizontal and vertical print magnifications that can
be set.

Print Magnification

Vertical Magnification (factor) Horizontal Magnification (factor)

10 1

20 2

50 5

100 10

200 20

500 50

1K 100

2K 200

5K 500

10K 1K

20K AUTO

50K

100K

AUTO

TIP • When “AUTO” is set, the optimal printing magnification is automatically chosen. During
normal operation, it is recommended to use the “AUTO” setting.

• The vertical and horizontal magnification has been factory-set to “AUTO” (automatic
optimal magnification).

10-12 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Printer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Print Setup screen

3 Select “V-scale” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Vertical Print Magnification

Setup screen
 4 Select the vertical scale with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • When “2K” is selected, the print magnification factor is set

to 2000 times.

No. 99MBB122A 10-13

Print Setup screen
 The set vertical magnification is displayed on the Print Setup
screen.

Print Setup screen

5 Select “H-scale” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Horizontal Print Magnification

Setup screen
6 Select the horizontal scale with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Print Setup screen

 The set horizontal magnification is displayed on the Print Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-14 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.3.2.3 Setting the printer

The SJ-210 supports the following printers.

The necessary settings depend on the printer used.

Printer Type Printer Model

PT-1 178-421

PT-2 㧙

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Printer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Print Setup screen

3 Select “SelectPrint.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys.

No. 99MBB122A 10-15

Print Setup screen
4 Set the printer type.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
PT-1 and PT-2.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-16 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.3.3 Setting data output to save data

You can save calculation results and measurement data to the memory card when data
output is set to “Data storage”.

With this setting, calculation results and measurement data are saved to the memory card
when the [POWER/DATA] key of the SJ-210 is pressed.

NOTE • The factory default setting for data output is “SPC”.

• After the power to the instrument is turned on, it may take more time than usual when
the data is saved for the first time.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

2SHUDWLQJ(QY

2 Select “Data storage” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the

[Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 10-17

10.3.4 Setting the data output to hard copy

You can perform an image capture of displayed calculation results when data output is set
to “Hard copy”.

With this setting, graphical data of the displayed calculation results image is saved to the
memory card when the [POWER/DATA] key of the SJ-210 is pressed.

NOTE • The factory default setting for data output is “SPC”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Hard copy” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

10-18 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.4 Setting the Language Display

The SJ-210 supports the following languages.

࡮Japanese ࡮English ࡮German ࡮French

࡮Italian ࡮Spanish ࡮Portuguese ࡮Korean

࡮Chinese (traditional) ࡮Chinese (simplified) ࡮Czech ࡮Polish

࡮Hungarian ࡮Turkish ࡮Swedish ࡮Dutch

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “SelectLanguage” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Language Selection screen

2 Select the display language with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.
To cancel the selection, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead of the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
 The display switches to the selected language.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 10-19

10.5 Calibrating Drive Unit Speed and Settings
Other than the standard drive unit, the SJ-210 also supports the detector retracting type
drive unit as well as the transverse tracing type drive unit. As specifications such as
start-up distance and maximum traversal distance differ depending on the drive unit used,
the drive unit must be set up.

IMPORTANT • When the drive unit is exchanged, traversing speed calibration must be performed.
There is a possibility that calculation results may be affected.

This is an explanation of the drive unit settings on the display unit.

TIP • For information about changing the drive unit refer to 3.2, “Attaching and Detaching the
Drive/Detector Unit”.

• To perform traversing speed calibration, the instrument must be calibrated using the
included roughness specimen.
For the placement of the roughness specimen and the SJ-210, refer to 6.1, “Calibration
Preparation”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Drive” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Drive Unit Setup screen

2 Select a drive unit type with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

10-20 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

3 Set the nominal value for traversing speed calibration.

Calibration Setup screen
a On the Calibration Setup screen, press the “Nom Val.” ([Red] key).

NOTE • Use the included roughness specimen for calibration.

Confirm the placement of the drive unit with the roughness
specimen.

TIP • To cancel calibration, press the [Esc/Guide] key. Return to

the Operating Environment Setup menu.

Nominal Value Setup screen

b Input the nominal value.

IMPORTANT • The nominal value must be set to 100m (3937 in)

when using the included roughness specimen.

TIP • Pressing the “AC” ([Blue] key) sets the value to 0.

To change the position of decimal point, place the cursor at
the desired position and press the “Decimal” ([Red] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

c Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Calibration Setup screen
 The entered nominal value is displayed on the Calibration Setup
screen.

4 Press the [START/STOP] key to begin measurement.

Calibration Setup screen
 After measurement the pitch result is displayed.
To cancel the displayed result, press the “Cancel” ([Blue] key).

No. 99MBB122A 10-21

 5 Three measurements need to be made, from 0.25mm/s to 0.75
mm/s (0.010 in/s to 0.030 in/s).
Calibration Setup screen
6 Press the “Update” ([Red] key).

 The traversing speed of the calibration result is changed.

7 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

10-22 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.6 Switching the Measurement Units

When necessary, change the unit for the data such as the measurement results shown on
the display. The units can be set to “mm” or “inch”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Switch unit” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Unit Selection screen

2 Select the unit of measurement to use with the [ χ ] [ ω ] keys,
and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 10-23

10.7 Setting the Decimal Point
You can change the character used as a decimal point in measurement displays, etc. The
character can be a period, or a comma.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Decimal Point” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Decimal Point selection

2 Select the decimal point to use with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

10-24 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.8 Adjust the Volume of Indicator Sounds

You can adjust the volume of the buzzer that sounds when the operation keys are
pressed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Volume Adjust.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Volume Adjustment screen

2 Select the volume level with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-25

10.9 Restricting Operation Functions (Customization)
You can restrict the access of certain screens from the Main Menu screen with a password.
The password is a 4-digit number.

IMPORTANT • If you forget the password, you will not be able to navigate beyond the Main Menu
screen. In such cases, you can access the Operating Environment Setup menu by
using the fixed password “210*”. Display the Function Restriction Setup screen and
enter a new password.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Func. Restrict” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Function Restriction
Setup screen
2 Press the “Password” ([Red] key).

10-26 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

Password Setup screen

3 Enter a 4-digit numeric password, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

NOTE • When no password is entered and “****” is displayed when

the [Enter/Menu] key is pressed, the password is set to
“****”.

TIP • For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

Function Restriction
Setup screen
4 Select the item for password restriction with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycle through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Password restricted.
“OFF”: No password restriction.

Function Restriction
Setup screen
 The selected items displayed as “ON” are restricted.

5 Carry out step 4 for all items that you want to restrict with passwords.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-27

10.10 Memory Card Formatting and File Management
You can format the memory card using the SJ-210. You can also delete individual files
from the memory card.

IMPORTANT • You must use the SJ-210 to format the memory card. The SJ-210 cannot save to or
read data from a card that was not formatted using the SJ-210. In such cases, the
memory card icon is not be displayed. Also, when you try to access the Memory Card
Setup screen, “Memory card error!” is displayed.

• When using the formatted memory card on a machine other than the SJ-210 (such as
PCs), card access may be slow.

Here are the various procedures explained.

10.10.1 Formatting the memory card

IMPORTANT • When the memory card is formatted, all of its contents are erased.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “microSD” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

10-28 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

3 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen
 “Initialization” is displayed and the memory card is formatted.

NOTE • The format may take several minutes.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10.10.2 Checking the save status of the memory card

You can confirm the number of saved items on the memory card.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “Use Cond.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-29

 Usage Condition screen
3 Confirm the number of saved items on the memory card.
You can delete data saved on the memory card by type.
To delete data, follow the procedures below.

NOTE • When you belete the measurement data, the text data is
also deleted at the same time.

Usage Condition screen

a Select the desired type of data to be deleted with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys,
and press the “Delete” ([Blue] key).

b Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Usage Condition screen
 The date of the selected type is deleted, and the number of saved
items becomes 0.

NOTE • When many files are being deleted, the process may take
several minutes.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-30 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.10.3 Saving text data to the memory card

Measurement data can be saved in text format to the memory card.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “Text file” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Text File Saving Setup screen

3 Select the type of data to be saved as text with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.
“OFF”: Sets the save as text function to OFF.
“All Data”: All data is saved as text.
“CalcResult”: Only calculation results are saved as text.

No. 99MBB122A 10-31

Memory Card Setup screen
 The selected item is set and the Memory Card Setup screen is
displayed.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-32 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.10.4 Setting the Save 10 function

The instrument can be set to automatically save the latest 10 measurements to the
memory card.
This function is called “Save 10”. Note that when more than 10 total items are saved, the
older data is then deleted.

NOTE • After the power to the instrument is turned on, it may take more time than usual when
the data is saved for the first time.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “Save10Data” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys.

No. 99MBB122A 10-33

Memory Card Setup screen
3 Setting the Save 10 function to ON or OFF.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Sets the Save 10 function to ON.
“OFF”: Sets the Save 10 function to OFF.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-34 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.10.5 Backing up the memory card and restoring backup data

You can back up 10 measurement conditions from the internal memory to the memory
card. Also, you can restore the backed up data from the memory card.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “Backup” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Backup screen
3 Select “Main unit to SD” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-35

 Memory Card Setup screen
 The backup is performed, and the date of the backup is displayed
on the Memory Card Setup screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Memory Card” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Memory Card Setup screen

2 Select “Backup” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Backup screen
3 Select “SD to main unit” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

 The backed up data is restored.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-36 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.11 Setting the Auto-sleep Function

The SJ-210 has an auto-sleep function for when the built-in battery is being used.

NOTE • When the AC adapter is used, auto-sleep does not function irrespective of the setting of
the auto-sleep function. To turn off the SJ-210 power, press and hold the [Esc/Guide]
key.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Auto-sleep” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Auto-Sleep Setup screen

2 Set the auto-sleep function to ON or OFF.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Sets the auto-sleep function to ON.
“OFF”: Sets the auto-sleep function to OFF.

Auto-Sleep Setup screen

3 Select “Wait time” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-37

Waiting Time Setup screen
4 Set the amount of time to pass until auto-sleep.

TIP • To clear the set time, press the “AC” ([Blue] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Auto-Sleep Setup screen
 The wait time is set and and displayed on the Auto-Sleep Setup
screen.

TIP • To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead

of the [Enter/Menu] key.

• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-38 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.12 Setting the Self-timer

You can set measurement to begin after an amount of time has passed from pressing the
[START/STOP] key.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Self-timer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Self-Timer Setup screen

2 Set the self-timer function to ON or OFF.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Sets the self-timer function to ON.
“OFF”: Sets the self-timer function to OFF.

Self-Timer Setup screen

3 Select “Wait time” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-39

 Waiting Time Setup screen
4 Set the amount of time before measurement is to begin.

TIP • To clear the set time, press the “AC” ([Blue] key).

• For information about numeric value entry, refer to 2.5,

“Entering Numeric Values/Characters”.

5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

To cancel settings input, press the [Esc/Guide] key instead of the
[Enter/Menu] key.
Self-Timer Setup screen
 The wait time is set and and displayed on the Self-Timer Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-40 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.13 Setting PC Communication Conditions

This is an explanation of setting the RS-232C interface to communicate with a PC.

NOTE • The SJ-210's RS-232C connector is used for both printer and PC connectivity.
The RS-232C communication settings here are for PC communication only. Printer
communication conditions are internally fixed.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “PC communicat.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

PC Communication
Setup screen
2 Setting the RS-232C communication function to ON or OFF.
Pressing the [Enter/Menu] key cycles through the available settings,
“ON” and “OFF”.
“ON”: Sets RS-232C communication to ON.
“OFF”: Sets RS-232C communication to OFF.

NOTE • When “RS-232C” is set to ON, communication to the PC is

prioritized even when data output is set to “Printer”.

PC Communication
Setup screen
3 Select “Speed” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-41

Communication Speed Setup screen
4 Select a communication speed with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

PC Communication Setup screen

 The selected item is displayed on the PC Communication Setup
screen.

PC Communication Setup screen

5 Select “Parity” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Parity Setup screen

6 Select a parity with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

10-42 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

PC Communication Setup screen

 The selected item is displayed on the PC Communication Setup
screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 10-43

10.14 Displaying the Position of the Detector
You can confirm the current position of the detector.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Detect Pos.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

Detector Position
Display screen
2 Confirm the position of the detector.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-44 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.15 Testing the Display and Operation Keys

You can confirm that the display's colors are correct and that the operation keys are
responding correctly.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “LCD/key test” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

2 Confirm that the red color is displayed properly, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

3 Confirm that the green color is displayed properly, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

4 Confirm that the blue color is displayed properly, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.
LCD/Key Test screen
5 Press each key to confirm that they are responding correctly.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the Operating

Environment Setup screen. Test all the keys except for the
[Esc/Guide] key.

No. 99MBB122A 10-45

10.16 Restoring Factory Default Settings
You can reset all settings in the SJ-210 to their original values (factory default settings).

IMPORTANT • Care must be taken when resetting to the factory-set defaults. When the SJ-210 is
reset, all of your set measurement conditions, etc. are be lost.

• Drive unit type settings, calibration information, decimal point settings and language
settings remain unchanged.
For information about the contents of the factory default settings, refer to 10.16.1, “Items
restored to original values when restoring factory default settings”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “ResetToDefault” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

2 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 All initial settings are restored.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”

([Blue] key) is pressed.

10-46 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.16.1 Items restored to original values when restoring factory default settings

 Measurement data: all data is cleared.

 Measurement conditions, parameter detail settings, GO/NG judgment result tolerance

values

Measurement conditions

Number of Pre-travel Traversal

Standard Profile Parameter Filters λc λs Range
sampling lengths Post-travel speed

3
ISO1997 R GAUSS 0.8 0.25 5 ON 0.5 AUTO
(Ra, Rq, Rz)

Parameter detail settings

Number of Height of the Reference

Parameter Definition Unit Slice level Slice depth
sections slice level line

Sm/Pc/Ppi/Rc Zp/Zv % 㧙 10.0 㧙 㧙 㧙

HSC Peak % 㧙 10.0 㧙 㧙 㧙

mr N 㧙 1 㧙 㧙 0% 0.1m (3.9 in)

mr(c) Peak % 2 㧙 10%, 15% 㧙 㧙

σc 㧙 㧙 1 㧙 25% 10% 㧙

AnnexA ON 㧙 㧙 㧙 㧙 㧙 㧙

GO/NG judgment: the mean and tolerance values are all 0.

 Calibration measurement nominal values, calibration conditions, calibration history

(except for the last calibration performed)
Nominal value: 2.95 (standard type, retractable type), 1.00 (transverse tracing type)
Calibration history: to be cleared.

Calibration conditions (standard type, retractable type)

Standard Filters λc Number of sampling lengths Traversal speed Range

JIS1994 GAUSS 2.5 5 0.75 AUTO

Calibration conditions (transverse tracing type)

Standard Filters λc Number of sampling lengths Traversal speed Range

JIS1994 GAUSS 0.8 5 0.5 AUTO

No. 99MBB122A 10-47

  Stylus alarm cumulative distance and threshold: to be cleared.

 Volume setting: level 3

 Auto-sleep setting
Auto-sleep: ON
Wait time: 30 sec

 Self-timer setting
Self-timer: OFF
Wait time: 5 sec

 PC communication setup

RS-232C Speed Parity Data Stop

OFF 38400 NONE 8 bit 1 bit

 Screen setup

Evaluation
Calculation results Graphs Condition Lists Set conditions Display direction
profiles

One vertical column Vertical display Vertical display Vertical display Display Rightward

 10 conditions files: to be cleared.

10-48 No. 99MBB122A

 10. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SETUP

10.17 Checking the Version

You can check the installed software version of the SJ-210.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Version” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Version information
2 Confirm the version information, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

No. 99MBB122A 10-49

MEMO

10-50 No. 99MBB122A

 11 SWITCHING THE
CALCULATION RESULTS
SCREEN
The S-210 can modify the display direction (vertical, horizontal) or
the number of the parameters to display on the screen.

Display screen can be switched as follow.

 Switching the Calculation Results screen: The Calculation Results display can be
selected from 6 types of display.

 Switching the Evaluation Profile screen: The display can be selected from the
Vertical display/Horizontal
display/Non-display.

 Switching the Graph Display screen: The display can be selected from the
Vertical display/Horizontal
display/Non-display.

 Switching the Condition List screen: The display can be selected from the
Vertical display/Horizontal
display/Non-display.

 Setting the display of the setting conditions: Display/Non-display the setting

conditions can be selected when turning
the power on.

 Switching the display direction: Display direction can be selected as

desired.

No. 99MBB122A 11-1

11.1 Screen Display
■ Calculation Result display

Display can be selected from 6 types as follow.

1 Parameter 3/4 Parameter Trace

Vertical
display
Horizontal
display

■ Evaluation profile/Graph/Condition list display

The display can be selected from the Vertical display/Horizontal display/Non-display.

Evaluation profiles Graphs Condition Lists

Vertical
display
Horizontal
display

11-2 No. 99MBB122A

 11. SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN

■ Switching the display direction

It is effective on the horizontal display.

Rightward example

Leftward example

No. 99MBB122A 11-3

11.2 Switching the Calibration Results Screens Guide
■ Screens guide

1 2 3
Home screen Main Menu screen Screen Change Menu screen

[Enter/Menu] [Enter/Menu]

[Esc/Guide] [Esc/Guide]

[Esc/Guide] [Enter/Menu]
4
Calculation Result Display Evaluation Profile Display Condition List Display
Setup screen Setup screen Graph Display Setup screen Setup screen

Refer to 11.3 Refer to 11.4 Refer to 11.5 Refer to 11.6

Condition Display Setup Display Direction Setup
screen screen

Refer to 11.7 Refer to 11.8

11-4 No. 99MBB122A

 11. SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN

■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen

Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Screen Change” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

No. 99MBB122A 11-5

11.3 Switching Calculation Results Screen
The display can be set up to display the calculated results vertically/horizontally on the
screens. It can also be set up to display multiple numbers of parameter on one screen.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “Calc. Result” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Calculation Result Display

Setup screen
2 Select Calculation Result Setup screen with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.
The following table shows the setup item and content of the setup
screen.

Setup item Description

Display direction Display parameters

1Verticac. 1

3Verticac. Vertical 3

V. Trace 1

1 Horiz. 1

4 Horiz. Horizontal 4

H. Trace 1

TIP • For information about displaying the vertical/horizontal

trace, refer to 5.1.6, “Trace display”.

11-6 No. 99MBB122A

 11. SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • For information about display after setup has been

completed, refer to 11.1, “Screen Display”.
• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.
• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 11-7

11.4 Switching Evaluation Profile Screen
This section explains how to set the display direction and non-display of the evaluation
profile.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “Eval-Prof.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Evaluation Profile Display

Setup screen
2 Select the display direction of the evaluation profile with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ]
key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
The setup item is as follows.
“V-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the evaluation profile to vertical.
“H-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the evaluation profile to
horizontal.
“No Disp.”: The evaluation profile is not displayed.

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • For information about display after setup has been

completed, refer to 11.1, “Screen Display”.
• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.
• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

11-8 No. 99MBB122A

 11. SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN

11.5 Switching Graph Display Screen

This section explains how to set the display direction or select the non-display of the
graphs (BAC/ADC graphs) after measurement.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “Graph” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

Graph Display Setup screen

2 Select the display direction of the graph with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and
press the [Enter/Menu] key.
The setup item is as follows.
“V-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the graph to vertical.
“H-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the graph to horizontal.
“No Disp.”: The graph is not displayed.

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • For information about display after setup has been

completed, refer to 11.1, “Screen Display”.
• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.
• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 11-9

11.6 Switching Measurement Conditions List Screen
This section explains how to set the display direction and select non-display of the current
measurement conditions list.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “Cond.List” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Condition List Display

Setup screen
2 Select the display direction of the evaluation profile with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ]
key, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.
The setup item is as follows.
“V-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the conditions list to vertical.
“H-Disp.”: Set the display direction of the conditions list to horizontal.
“No Disp.”: The conditions list is not displayed.

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • For information about display after setup has been

completed, refer to 11.1, “Screen Display”.
• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.
• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

11-10 No. 99MBB122A

 11. SWITCHING THE CALCULATION RESULTS SCREEN

11.7 Setting the Display of the Setting Conditions

This section explains the setup whether to display the settings such as the calibration date,
cumulative distance and data output when turning the power on.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “SetCondit.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Condition Display Setup screen

2 Select the setting conditions display with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] key, and press
the [Enter/Menu] key.
The setup item is as follows.
“Display”: Displays the setting conditions.
“Non Disp.”: The setting conditions are not displayed.

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.

• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

No. 99MBB122A 11-11

11.8 Switching the Display Direction
When displaying the screen to the horizontal, operation key position can be switched to
the rightward or leftward.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Screen Change Menu screen” in Section 11.2.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Screen Change Menu screen
1 Select “Disp. Dir” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Display Direction Setup screen

2 Select display direction with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.
The setup item is as follows.
“R-hand”: Set the operation key position to the rightward on the screen.
“L-hand”: Set the operation key position to the leftward on the screen.

Screen Change Menu screen

 The setup items appear on the Screen Change Menu screen.

TIP • For information about display after setup has been

completed, refer to 11.1, “Screen Display”.
• Press the [Esc/Guide] key to return to the previous screen.
• The screen returns to the Home screen when the “Home”
([Blue] key) is pressed.

11-12 No. 99MBB122A

 12 USEFUL FEATURES OF
THE SJ-210
This chapter describes features of the SJ-210 to make it more useful.

The SJ-210 provides following features.

For information about details and the settings, see the reference sections.

12.1 Shortcut Key

Shortcut keys for accessing the “Measurement Conditions screen” and “Measurement
Conditions Files Register screen” are on the Home screen.
The cutoff lengths of the measurement conditions can be modified directly by pressing the
[ ← ] key. Likewise, the number of sampling lengths of the measurement conditions can be
modified directly by pressing the [ → ] key.
Shortcut keys are as follows.

Shortcut Key Description

[ ← ] key Changes the cutoff length (λc) to the INC.

[ → ] key Changes the number of sampling lengths to the INC.

[Blue] key Displays the screen to load 10 measurement conditions which

are saved in the memory of the SJ-210.

[Red] key Displays the Measurement Conditions screen.

Assignment of the shortcut keys

No. 99MBB122A 12-1

12.2 Guidance Screen
Description for functions of the operating keys can be checked using the guidance
functions.
For information about the guidance functions, refer to 2.4, “Displaying the Guide Screen”.

Guide screen

12.3 Indicating Contact State of the Detector

Whether the position of the detector is on the measurable range can be checked on this
screen.
Check the color here.

Indicating contact state of the detector

 When the item “Date” is blue, the detector tip is in the measurable position indicating
it's in the measurable state.

 When the item “Date” is red, the detector tip is not in the measurable position
indicating it's not in the measurable state.

NOTE • This function is effective other than the retracting type drive unit.

12-2 No. 99MBB122A

 12. USEFUL FEATURES OF THE SJ-210

12.4 Displaying Calculation Results of the Continuous

Measurement (Vertical Trace/Horizontal Trace)
The SJ-210 can save measurement results of the last 10 measurements for every
customized parameter.
The measurement results are displayed in the chronological order. The latest
measurement result is displayed in the highest column on the screen. The older
measurement results are displayed in the lower columns in the chronological order.
The [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys can be used to switch the displays shown in the lower columns than the
second highest column.
Only the latest measurement result can be saved in the memory card, printed, and
outputted as SPC data.

㨇 ↓ 㨉

㨇 ↑ 㨉

Trace screen

NOTE • The result data of the measurements performed before the last 10 measurements are
deleted in order from the oldest data.
• The trace data is cleared when the Trace screen is freshened.
• The trace data may be cleared when the measurement conditions are changed.

TIP • For information about setting the Trace screen, refer to 11.3, “Switching Calculation
Results Screen”.

No. 99MBB122A 12-3

12.5 Loading/Saving 10 Measurement Conditions
Measurement conditions can be set in the memory of the SJ-210 up to 10. To load the
measurement conditions saved in the memory of the SJ-210, just press the [Blue] key on
the Home screen.
Select measurement conditions to load with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.
Home screen Internal Memory Load screen

[Blue]

Displaying the SJ-210 Memory Load screen

NOTE • Measurement conditions saved in the memory of the SJ-210 will be deleted if power
supply from both the AC adapter and battery is cut off.

TIP • For information about saving measurement conditions in the memory of the SJ-210,
refer to 7.13.2, “Saving measurement conditions”.

Ten measurement conditions saved in the memory of the SJ-210 can be backed up
collectively when power supply is cut off due to occasions such as replacing the battery.
You can load measurement conditions that have been backed up in the memory of the
SJ-210.

Backup screen

TIP • For more information about backing up to the memory card from the memory of the
SJ-210, or restoring backup data from the memory card, refer to 10.10.5, “Backing up
the memory card and restoring backup data”.

12-4 No. 99MBB122A

 12. USEFUL FEATURES OF THE SJ-210

12.6 Saving Measurement Results Automatically

When the Save 10 function is enabled, measurement results can be saved on the memory
card automatically.
Measurement results are saved in the memory card's Save 10 folder. To load the
measurement results, select the “Read10Data” on the Measurement Result Menu screen.

Measurement Result Menu screen

You can save, print and recalculate the loaded results in the same way as the usual
measurement results.

NOTE • This function is available only when a memory card (optional) is inserted.
• The result data of the measurements performed before the last 10 measurements are
deleted in order from the oldest data.
• After the power to the instrument is turned on, the first time data is saved may take more
time than usual.

TIP • For information about setting the Save 10 function, refer to 10.10.4, “Setting the Save
10 function”.
• For information about loading measurement results which has been saved using the
Save 10 function, refer to 9.4, “Loading Measurement Results”.

12.7 Hard Copying the Screen

The displayed screen image can be saved as BMP data to the memory card.
The image data is saved in the “IMG” folder on the memory card.

The image data can be transferred to a personal computer using communication software
or a third-party SD card reader.

TIP • For information about setting the hard copying the screen, refer to 10.3.4, “Setting the
data output to hard copy”.
• The camera icon㧔 㧕appears on the upper screen during hard copy screen mode.

No. 99MBB122A 12-5

12.8 Automatic Printing After Completing Measurement
When the auto-print function is enabled, a measurement result can be printed when a
measurement is completed.

TIP • For information about setting the Auto-print, refer to 10.3.2, “Setting the data output to a
printer”.

12.9 Stylus Alarm

The stylus alarm function cumulates the measured lengths, and displays the message
when designated threshold value exceeds the cumulative distance.

TIP • For information about setting the Stylus Alarm, refer to 6.7, “Setting the Stylus Alarm”.
• A message is displayed every time the power is turned on. Set the setting of the
threshold to 0.0 when you do not want the message displayed.

12.10 Function Restriction

To prevent the settings (such as measurement conditions) from being modified, operations
for each setup item on the Main Menu can be disabled. To disable these operations, set
the password.

The setup items which the operation functions can be restricted are as follows.

 Calibration measurement

 Measurement conditions

 Measured data

 Parameter

 Operating environment setup

 Screen change

 N (sampling lengths) result

TIP • For information about setting the function restriction, refer to 10.9, “Restricting
Operation Functions (Customization)”.

12-6 No. 99MBB122A

 12. USEFUL FEATURES OF THE SJ-210

12.11 Foot Switch

It is possible to start measurement using the foot switch. The foot switch is an optional
accessory. Please purchase it if necessary.

Foot switch
connector

Rear view of the display unit (the rear cover is removed)

12.12 Self-timer
You can set measurement to begin after an amount of time has passed from pressing the
[START/STOP] key with the Self-timer function.

TIP • For information about setting the self-timer, refer to 10.12, “Setting the Self-timer”.

No. 99MBB122A 12-7

MEMO

12-8 No. 99MBB122A

 13 SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS
USING [POWER/DATA]
KEY
You can output or save measurement results to a connected optional
accessory by pressing the [POWER/DATA] key.

By pressing the [POWER/DATA] key, you can save or output the selected function's
measurement results.

[POWER/DATA] key

Operation key ([POWER/DATA] key)

SPC: You can output measurement results to a data processor.

A data processor (e.g., DP-1VR) must be connected in advance.

Printer: You can output measurement results to a printer.

Perform a communications check to set communications conditions.

Saving data: Measurement results can be saved on the memory card.

(The file name is automatically generated.)

Hard copy: The currently displayed screen image is saved as image data to the
memory card.
(The file name is automatically generated.)

NOTE • A DP-1VR (optional accessory) must be purchased for SPC output.

• For printer output from the SJ-210, an external printer (optional accessory) and
proprietary RS-232C cable (optional accessory) must be purchased.

• To save data or create hard copies, a memory card (optional accessory) must be purchased.

No. 99MBB122A 13-1

13.1 SPC Data Output
By connecting the SJ-210 to a DP-1VR Digimatic data processor (optional accessory) with
an SPC cable (optional accessory), calculation results are output using SPC and can be
statistically processed and printed. Apart from recent measurements, data saved to the
memory card can be loaded and output with SPC for statistical processing and printing.

IMPORTANT • Only the calculation results of parameters with the SPC mark ( ) can be output as
SPC data. Parameter names, etc., are not output.

• When outputting parameter calculation results for statistical processing, take care to not
include data obtained with differing parameters.
An error may occur when multiple pieces of parameter data with differing units and
decimal place positions are output to the Digimatic data processor.

The operation flow of outputting SPC data is described below.

Connect the DP-1VR

→ 13.1.1, “Connecting the SJ-210 and the DP-1VR”

Set calculation result output to “SPC”

→ 10.3.1, “Setting data output to SPC”

When outputting When outputting saved data

Executing the actual measurement of the Loading saved data for output
roughness specimen
→ 9.4, “Loading Measurement Data”
→ Chapter 4, “MEASUREMENT OPERATION”

Selecting parameters to output

→ 13.1.2, “Selecting Parameters”

Outputting calculation results

→ 13.1.3, “Outputting SPC Data”

13-2 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.1.1 Connecting the SJ-210 and DP-1VR

IMPORTANT • Before connecting the SJ-210 to the DP-1VR, turn off the DP-1VR's unit settings. For
information about DP-1VR unit settings, see the DP-1VR User's Manual.

Connect the SJ-210 and DP-1VR using the SPC cable according to the following
procedure.

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.

(2)

(1) Rear cover

Detaching the rear cover

3 Use the proprietary SPC cable to connect the SJ-210 to the DP-1VR.
Data processor SJ-210
DP-1VR

SPC connector

Connect to the INPUT data port

Connecting the SPC cable

No. 99MBB122A 13-3

 4 Turn on the DP-1VR.
Data processor
DP-1VR

Turn ON the power.

Turning ON the DP-1VR

5 Set the SPC output.

NOTE • The DP-1VR's tolerances cannot be set with the SJ-210.

TIP • For information about setting SPC output, refer to 10.3.1, “Setting data output to SPC”.

13-4 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.1.2 Selecting parameters

Select the parameters for SPC output.

Only the calculation results of parameters displayed on the Home screen with the SPC
mark ( ) can be output as SPC data.

1 Press the [PAGE] key of the SJ-210 until the parameters you want to output are
displayed.

[PAGE]

Customized parameters
are displayed in turn.

Parameter display

2 When multiple parameters are displayed on the same screen, use the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys
to move the SPC mark, and select calculation result parameters to output.

[↓] [↓]

[ ↓ ]
[↓]

[↓]

[↓]

Parameter selection (multiple parameters on 1 screen)

No. 99MBB122A 13-5

13.1.3 Outputting SPC data

You can output calculation results from the SJ-210 to a DP-1VR when data output is set to
“SPC”.

With this setting made, calculation results are output when the [POWER/DATA] key on the
SJ-210, or the [DATA] key on the DP-1VR is pressed.

TIP • For information about the connection of the SJ-210 and DP-1VR, refer to 13.1.1,
“Connecting the SJ-210 and DP-1VR”.

• For information about setting SPC output, refer to 10.3.1, “Setting the data output to
SPC”.

• You can load saved measurement data and output the calculation results. For
information about loading measurement data, refer to 9.4, “Loading Measurement
Results”.

■ Operation procedure

1 Perform the measurement.

TIP • For information about measurement, refer to Chapter 4, “MEASUREMENT

OPERATION”.

2 Press the [POWER/DATA] key of the SJ-210 or the [DATA] button on the DP-1VR.

 Calculation results are output from the SJ-210 to the DP-1VR.

TIP • For information on the statistical processing of measurement results, see the DP-1VR
User's Manual.

13-6 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.2 Printing to an External Printer

By connecting the SJ-210 to the printer (optional accessory) using the RS-232C printer
cable (optional accessory), you can print measurement conditions, calculation results,
evaluation profiles, and BAC or ADC contents.

NOTE • Two types of printers are available to use with the SJ-210, but apart from the printer
cable and individual printer settings, you can print using similar operation procedures.

TIP • You can load saved measurement data and print the results.
For information about loading measurement data, refer to 9.4, “Loading Measurement
Results”.

The operation flow for printing measurement results is described below.

There are two types of operations: general operations and operations on demand. The
former is performed regularly and the latter is performed as required. In the flow chart
below, solid lines indicate general operations and dotted line indicates operations on
demand.

Connecting the printer

→ 13.2.1, “Connecting the SJ-210 and the printer”

Setting the printer communication conditions

→ 13.2.2, “Setting the Printer Communication Conditions”

Set calculation result output to “Printer”

→ 10.3.2, “Setting data output to Printer”

Setting the print items

ń´6HWWLQJWKHSULQWLWHP

omized parameters are displayed in 

When printing When printing saved data

Executing the actual measurement of the Loading saved data for printing
roughness specimen
→ 9.4, “Loading Measurement Data”
→ Chapter 4, “MEASUREMENT OPERATION”

→ 13.2.3, “Printing calculation results and measurement conditions”

No. 99MBB122A 13-7

13.2.1 Connecting the SJ-210 and printer

In order to print, the SJ-210 must be connected to the printer with the RS-232C printer
cable.

The following optional printers are supported.

Printer Type Printer Model

PT-1 178-421

PT-2 㧙

1 Place your nail on the hollow provided on the rear cover, and push the rear cover in
the direction indicated by the arrow (1).

2 Pull the rear cover in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) and remove it.



6HWWL
 WKHSULQW

Detaching the rear cover

3 Connect the RS-232C communication port on the rear of the SJ-210 with the
RS-232C port on the printer using the optional RS-232C printer cable.

Printer

RS-232C Port
RS-232C
printer cable
RS-232C
communication port

Connecting to the printer

4 Turn ON the printer power.

13-8 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.2.2 Setting the printer communication conditions

Printer communication conditions are set at the time of purchase. By connecting the
SJ-210 to the printer and performing a communication check, the printer's communication
settings are automatically configured, and printing can then be performed.

NOTE • Only PT-1 printers support the communication check automatic configuration function.

TIP • For information about connecting the SJ-210 and printer, refer to 13.2.1, “Connecting
the SJ-210 and printer”.

■ Operating procedure (Refer to “■ Accessing the Operating Environment Setup Menu screen” in Section
10.1.)

Home screen to Main Menu  

Operating Environment
Setup menu screen
1 Select “Data Output” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu]
key.

Data Output Setup screen

2 Select “Printer” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the [Enter/Menu] key.

NOTE • The factory default setting for data output is “SPC”. when
using a printer for data output, be sure to change the output
setting to “Printer”.

Print Setup screen

3 Press the “COMCheck” ([Red] key).

 A confirmation message is displayed.

No. 99MBB122A 13-9

Confirmation message
4 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

 The communication check is performed, and the printer's

communication settings are automatically configured.
When the communication check and the printer configuration are
complete, the message “Restart Printer” is displayed.

NOTE • When an error message is displayed during the

communication check, manually set the printer's
communication conditions according to the below table.
For information on how to set the printer, see the printer's
user manual.

Setup item Setting value

COMMAND MODE MODE A

BAUD RATE 38400 bps

BIT LENGTH 8 bit

PARITY NON

BUSY CONTROL RTS/CTS

Confirmation message
5 Press the [Enter/Menu] key.

6 Turn OFF, and then turn ON the printer power.

 The printer can now be used.

13-10 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.2.3 Printing calculation results and measurement conditions

You can print out calculation results or measurement conditions from the SJ-210 when
data output is set to “Printer”.

Calculation results or measurements conditions are printed when the [POWER/DATA] key
is pressed.

TIP • For information about connecting the SJ-210 and printer, refer to 13.2.1, “Connecting
the SJ-210 and printer”.

• For information about setting data output, refer to 10.3.2, “Setting the data output to a
printer”.

• You can load saved measurement data and print the calculation results.For information
about loading measurement data, refer to 9.4, “Loading Measurement Results”.

1 Perform the measurement.

NOTE • For information about measurement, refer to Chapter 4, “MEASUREMENT

OPERATION”.

2 Display the calculation result to output.

3 Press the [POWER/DATA] key.

 Calculation results are printed.

No. 99MBB122A 13-11

■ Printout examples

Printout examples from the SJ-210 are shown below.

Print examples of measurement results and measurement conditions

13-12 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.2.4 Printing operating environment settings

You can print out operating environment setting items from the SJ-210 when data output is
set to “Printer”.

When the [POWER/DATA] key is pressed while the Operating Environment Menu screen
is displayed, the setting items are printed.

TIP • For information about connecting the SJ-210 and printer, refer to 13.2.1, “Connecting
the SJ-210 and printer”.

• For information about setting data output, refer to 10.3.2, “Setting the data output to a
printer”.

■ Operation procedure
Home screen
1 Press the [Enter/Menu] key on the Home screen to display the Main
Menu screen.

Main Menu screen

2 Select “Set Environ.” with the [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] keys, and press the
[Enter/Menu] key.

3 Press the [POWER/DATA] key from the Operating Environment Menu

screen.

 The contents of the operating environment settings are printed.

No. 99MBB122A 13-13

■ Printout examples

Printout examples from the SJ-210 are shown below.

Print example of operating environment setting items

13-14 No. 99MBB122A

 13. SAVE / OUTPUT RESULTS USING [POWER/DATA] KEY

13.3 Saving Data to the Memory Card

You can save measurement data or screen images to the memory card by pressing the
[POWER/DATA] key.

13.3.1 Saving measurement results to the memory card

You can save measurement data to the memory card when data output is set to “Data
storage”.

With this setting, measurement data is saved to the memory card when the
[POWER/DATA] key of the SJ-210 is pressed. Measurement data is saved in a designated
folder in the main folder.

NOTE • After the power to the instrument is turned on, the first time data is saved may take more
time than usual.

TIP • The “*” displayed to the left of a folder means that it is the main folder.
For information about designating the main folder, refer to 9.3.2, “Specifying the main
folder”.
For information about setting data output, refer to 10.3.3, “Setting the data output to
save data”.

Main folder display

■ Operation procedure

1 Perform the measurement.

TIP • For information about measurement, refer to Chapter 4, “MEASUREMENT

OPERATION”.

2 Press the [POWER/DATA] key.

 Measurement data is saved in a designated folder in the main folder.

No. 99MBB122A 13-15

13.3.2 Saving screen images to the memory card

You can perform a screen capture to save as image data (BMP format) of a displayed
calculation to the memory card. The image data is saved in the “IMG” folder on the
memory card.

The image data can be transferred to a personal computer using communication software
or a third-party SD card reader.

TIP • For information about setting data output, refer to 10.3.4, “Setting the data output to
hard copy”.

■ Operation procedure

1 Display the screen to capture.

2 Press the [POWER/DATA] key.

 The screen image is saved as image data (BMP format) to the memory card.

13-16 No. 99MBB122A

 14 INSTALLING THE SJ-210
WITH OPTIONAL
ACCESSORIES
This chapter explains the optional accessories for the easy setting of
workpieces.

Various optional accessories are offered for the SJ-210 so that it can measure a curved
(cylindrical, etc.) workpiece or a workpiece with a measured surface smaller than the size
of the SJ-210.

Support feet Nosepiece for flat surface Nosepiece for cylinder

Adapter for vertical application Extension rod Adapter for magnetic stand

Adapter for height gage

NOTE • The following optional accessories explained in this chapter cannot be used for
transverse tracing type drive/detector units:
Support feet, nosepiece for flat surface, nosepiece for cylinder, adapter for vertical
application, and extension rod

No. 99MBB122A 14-1

■ Support feet

Used to measure a workpiece that is smaller than the drive/detector unit.

 Dimensions and application example

Use the support feet on the drive/detector unit to adjust it to the required height as
shown below.
Support feet
No. 12AAA216

Drive/detector unit

Workpiece

Dimensions and application example of the support feet

 Attaching the support feet

1 Fit the two support feet in the grooves on the edges of the drive unit.

2 Adjust the height of the drive/detector unit so that it is parallel to the

measured surface.

3 After adjustment, fix the support feet by tightening the clamp screw
clockwise.

TIP • For information about setting of drive/detector unit, refer to 4.3.1, “Setting the workpiece
and SJ-210”.

Support feet

Clamp screw

Drive

Guide groove
Detector

Attaching the support feet

14-2 No. 99MBB122A

 14. INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

■ Nosepiece for flat surface

Used to protect the detector when measuring a flat workpiece that is smaller than the
SJ-210.

 Dimensions and application example

Support feet

SJ-210

Drive

Nosepiece for flat surface Nosepiece for flat surface

Work piece

Dimensions and application example of the nosepiece for flat surface

 Attaching the nosepiece for flat surface

NOTE • When attaching the nosepiece to the drive/detector unit, exercise care so that it does
not interfere with the detector body.

1 Fit the SJ-210 detector into the slot of the nosepiece.

2 Using the supplied Allen wrench, tighten the two screws shown in the
following figure.

Drive

Detector
Nosepiece for flat surface
No. 12AAA217

Screw

Attaching the nosepiece for flat surface

No. 99MBB122A 14-3

■ Nosepiece for cylinder

Used to protect and guide the detector when measuring a cylindrical workpiece that the
drive/detector unit can not be placed.

 Dimensions and application example

Support feet

Drive

Nosepiece for cylinder

Work piece

Dimensions and application example of the nosepiece for cylinder

 Attaching the nosepiece for cylinder

NOTE • When attaching the nosepiece to the drive/detector unit, exercise care so that it does
not interfere with the detector body.

1 Fit the SJ-210 detector into the slot of the nosepiece.

2 Using the supplied Allen wrench, tighten the two screws shown in the
following figure.

Detector
Nosepiece for cylinder
No. 12AAA218
Drive

Screw
Attaching the nosepiece for cylinder

14-4 No. 99MBB122A

 14. INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

■ Adapter for vertical application

Used to support the drive/detector unit for measuring a vertical groove in which the
drive/detector unit can not be placed.

 Dimensions and application example

Drive

Hold down by hand.

Adapter for vertical application
Work piece

Dimensions and application example of the adapter for vertical application

 Attaching the adapter for vertical application

1 Put the SJ-210 detector through the hole of the adapter.

2 Using the supplied Allen wrench, tighten the two screws shown in the
following figure.

Adapter for vertical application Detector

No. 12AAA219

Drive
Screw

Attaching the adapter for vertical application

No. 99MBB122A 14-5

■ Extension rod

Used to measure the inside surface of a deep hole.

IMPORTANT • Be sure to perform calibration when an extension rod is attached or removed.

• When an extension rod is installed, measurement is not possible to perform with the
stylus facing up.

Example of prohibiting the use of the extension rod

 Dimensions and application example

Drive
Work piece

Extension rod

Detector

Dimensions and application example of the extension rod

 Attaching the extension rod

1 Insert the extension rod into the drive unit.

2 Attach the detector to the extension rod.

Drive
Extension rod (50 mm) (19.7 in)
No. 12AAA210

Detector

Attaching the extension rod

14-6 No. 99MBB122A

 14. INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

■ Adapter for magnetic stand

Used to secure the drive/detector unit to the magnetic stand.

This adapter is useful when there is insufficient space for the SJ-210 (or the drive/detector
unit) or when the drive/detector unit cannot be held by hand.

 Dimensions and application example

A: 8 mm (0.315 in)/ 9.5 mm (3/8in)

Magnetic stand
Adapter for magnetic stand

Drive/detector unit

Dimensions and application example of the adapter for magnetic stand

 Attaching the adapter for magnetic stand

1 Attach the adapter for magnetic stand to the rear of the SJ-210
drive/detector unit.

2 Using the supplied Allen wrench, tighten the two screws shown in the
following figure.
Adapter for magnetic stand
No. 12AAA221 (A: 8 mm (0.315 in))
No. 12AAA220 (A: 9.5 mm (3/8 in))

Screw

Detector
Drive

Attaching the adapter for magnetic stand

No. 99MBB122A 14-7

■ Adapter for height gage

Used to secure the drive/detector unit to the height gage.

The height gage is used to set the height of the measuring position manually or when the
drive/detector unit cannot be held by hand.

 Dimensions and application example

Adapter for height gage

Drive

Nosepiece for flat surface

Height gage

Workpiece

Dimensions and application example of the adapter for the height gage

14-8 No. 99MBB122A

 14. INSTALLING THE SJ-210 WITH OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

 Attaching the adapter for the height gage

1 Attach the adapter to the rear of the SJ-210 drive unit.

2 Using the supplied Allen wrench, tighten the two screws shown in the
following figure.

Adapter for height gage

No.12AAA222
(A x B=9 x 9 mm)
No.12AAA233
(A x B=1/4 x 1/2 in)

Screw
Drive

Detector

Attaching the adapter for the height gage

No. 99MBB122A 14-9

MEMO

14-10 No. 99MBB122A

 15 MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION OF SJ-210

15.1 Daily Care

■ Checking for normal operation

To judge whether the SJ-210 is in normal operation, after calibrating it with the supplied
roughness specimen (Order No.178-601, 178-605), check that the dispersion of Ra values
is within ±0.05 m, which is obtained from repeated measurements of the same point.

However, when the measured point on the supplied roughness specimen (Order
No.178-601, 178-605) is changed during repeated measurement, the dispersion of ±0.09
m (±3% of the nominal value) included in the roughness specimen is added to that of the
Ra values. Care should be exercised.

NOTE • This dispersion in the roughness specimen is a value obtained under the conditions that
there are no dent and abrasion on the detector stylus tip and no scratch and abrasion on
the specimen surface.

■ Detaching the drive/detector unit

After a measurement task has been completed, store all the SJ-210 components and its
accessories in cases to keep out dust and moisture.

NOTE • Keep the built-in battery switch on unless the SJ-210 will not be used for a long period of
time (more than 2 to 3 weeks). With the built-in battery switch on, measurement results
obtained immediately before the SJ-210 is turned off by the auto-sleep function are
saved and displayed on the LCD the next time the instrument is used.
However, when the built-in battery switch is off, the measurement results will be lost.

TIP • For information on how to detach the drive/detector unit and the separation of the two,
refer to 3.2, “Attaching and Detaching the Drive/Detector Unit”.

No. 99MBB122A 15-1

■ Selecting a suitable storage place

Store the SJ-210 in a suitable place where the temperature can be maintained in a range
between –10 C and +40 C. The service life of the built-in battery varies a substantial
amount depending on the ambient temperature conditions, etc.

■ Cleaning the surface of the SJ-210

When the SJ-210 is soiled, wipe it using a soft, dry cloth. Do not use thinner or benzene for
cleaning.

15-2 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

15.2 Retracting the Detector

When moving the SJ-210 or not using it for a long period of time, retract the detector to
prevent damage to the detector or work piece caused by the detector tip interfering with
the work piece.

IMPORTANT • Do not perform detector retraction when an extension rod (optional) is installed. The
extended detector is subject to an external force: This may cause breakage of the drive
unit.

• 㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪘㪚㩷㪸㪻㪸㫇㫋㪼㫉㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪸㪺㫋㫀㫍㪸㫋㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㪹㫐㩷㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㫅㪸㫃㩷㪹㪸㫋㫋㪼㫉㫐㪅

■ Detector retraction of the SJ-210 standard type

Drive unit

Detector

Retraction
Direction of detector
movement
Detector retraction

■ Retraction procedure of the detector of SJ-210 standard type

NOTE • In the SJ-210 retracting type and transverse tracing drive type, the detector escapes all
the way to the front with the detector tip down.

1 When the power is off, press the [POWER/DATA] key while holding down the
[START/STOP] key.

 This retracts the detector. During retraction, “Retraction in progress” is

displayed.

 The power turns off, upon completion of retraction.

No. 99MBB122A 15-3

■ Canceling the detector retraction state of the SJ-210 standard type

1 Press the [POWER/DATA] key to turn on the power.

2 Press the [START/STOP] key.

 The detector returns to the position it was in before retraction started. While the
detector is being moved, “Being returned” is displayed.

 The Home screen is displayed after the extended out state has been released.

■ Detector retraction status of the SJ-210 retracting type

The SJ-210 retracting type detector is always extended to the front before starting
measurement. When the [START/STOP] key is pressed, the SJ-210 drives the detector
from the extended out position and starts measurement after passing the extension range.



2 (Escaping range)

Detector retraction status (SJ-210 retracting type)

NOTE • In the SJ-210 retracting type and transverse tracing drive type, the detector escapes all
the way to the front with the detector tip down.

15-4 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

15.3 Replacing the Built-in Battery Pack

■ Replacing procedure of the built-in battery pack

IMPORTANT • Follow the directions given below and exercise care when replacing the built-in battery
pack not to break or damage the PCB or cable.

NOTE • The built-in battery pack replacement should be done where there is as little dust and
other shop contamination as possible. In addition, exercise care so that dust or oil mist
does not penetrate the display unit. During the built-in battery pack replacement, the
circuit board in the SJ-210 is temporarily exposed. A malfunction may result if dust or
shop contamination soils the circuit board.

1 Separate the drive/detector unit from the display unit.

2 Remove the two tapping screws at the bottom of the display unit using a Phillips
screwdriver.
Do not lose the tapping screws and drive/detector unit retaining plate during this
operation.
Tapping screw

Tapping screw
Display Unit

Drive/detec
Drive/detector unit tor unit
retaining plate

Detaching the tapping screws

No. 99MBB122A 15-5

 3 Gently remove the bottom section of the display unit.

IMPORTANT • Exercise care when removing the bottom section of the display unit. The top and bottom
sections of the display unit are connected with cables, which, including the connectors,
may be damaged when excessively strained.

Display unit bottom

section

Display unit top section

Detaching the bottom section of the display unit.

15-6 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

4 Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit board inside the display unit: One
connects the top and bottom sections of the display unit, and the other is connected
to the built-in battery pack.

Circuit board

Detaching the connector

No. 99MBB122A 15-7

 5 Detach the cable of the built-in battery pack from the cable support plate.

IMPORTANT • Never remove the cable support plate. Otherwise, the spring of the drive/detector unit
retaining pin comes out.

• When detaching the cable of the built-in battery pack, make sure not to break the cable
support plate’s hooks. Otherwise, cables might be stuck and damaged by the inside of
the display unit.

Shrinkable tube
㧔㧕

Cable support
plate

㧔㧕

Detaching the cable

15-8 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

6 Remove the built-in battery pack from the display unit.

Built-in battery pack (2)

(1)

Removing the built-in battery pack

7 Place a new built-in battery pack properly inside the display unit.

(2)

(1)

Placing the built-in battery pack

No. 99MBB122A 15-9

 8 Fix the cable into the cable support plates.
Fix the cable with the hook (1) at the built-in battery side, and the hook (2) at other
side.

IMPORTANT • When fixing the cable of the built-in battery pack, do not use any pointed tools such as
driver. Otherwise, the coating of cable might be torn and then the built-in battery might
be shorted.

• When fixing the cable of the built-in battery pack to the cable support plate, make sure
to fix the part that is covered with shrinkable tube.

• Never remove the cable support plate. Otherwise, the spring of the drive/detector unit
retaining pin comes out.

Shrinkable tube
㧔㧕

Cable support
plate

㧔㧕

Fixing the cable

15-10 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

9 Check that the cable of built-in battery pack is fastened and are wired securely as
shown below.

IMPORTANT • Make sure to fix the cable of the built-in battery pack to the cable support plate.
Otherwise, the cable might be damaged by the protrusion inside the display
unit, and then the built-in battery might be shorted.

ࠤ࡯ࡉ࡞㈩✢ߩ⏕⹺

Confirming the cable wiring condition

No. 99MBB122A 15-11

 10 Reconnect the connector, which connects the top and bottom sections of the display
unit, and built-in battery pack connector to the board in the display unit.

NOTE • When reconnecting the two connectors, note their location and orientation. Firmly
connect them. When the connectors are not firmly connected, the instrument may not
operate properly.

Connector connection

11 Couple the bottom section of the display unit with the top section.

IMPORTANT • Exercise care not to have the cable pinched by the PCBs or by the upper and lower
sections of the display unit when fitting the lower section to the upper section. Cable
disconnection or display unit breakage may result.

15-12 No. 99MBB122A

 15. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SJ-210

12 While confirming that the hooks on the drive/detector unit retaining plate are
correctly aligned, tighten the two tapping screws on the bottom face of the display
unit.

NOTE • The tapping screws must not be tightened to more than 29.4 N㨯cm (3 kgf㨯cm).
Otherwise, the display unit may be damaged.

Drive/detector unit
retaining plate

Drive/detector unit retaining plate

No. 99MBB122A 15-13

MEMO

15-14 No. 99MBB122A

 16 TROUBLESHOOTING
In this chapter, check point and what to do when you have trouble
with the instrument are described.

16.1 System Operation

■ System operation

Symptom/Error Possible causes Remedies

display
SJ-210 can not be turned Remaining battery voltage is low. Recharge the battery.
on when is powered by the
built-in battery (and with
the AC adapter Built-in battery switch is set to OFF. Set the built-in battery switch to ON.
disconnected).

SJ-210 can not be turned Poor connection of the AC adapter. Connect the AC adapter properly.
on when the AC adapter is
connected. Other than the above. Contact your dealer or the nearest Mitutoyo sales
office.

Built-in battery can not be Built-in battery switch is set to OFF. Set the built-in battery switch to ON.
recharged. The battery has deteriorated. Replace the battery pack.
Recharge sign is not
displayed. The built-in battery is fully charged. Recharge the battery when the display of remaining
battery power moves to a low level.

An AC adapter other than the one supplied with Use the supplied AC adapter only.
the SJ-210 was used.

The display goes off The power was turned off by the Auto-sleep Press the [POWER/DATA] key to turn off the power.
unexpectedly. function.

The power does not turn The AC adapter is used. Keep holding down the [Esc/Guide] key for more than
off. The Auto-sleep function has been set to OFF. 3 seconds.

Cumulative distance is Result of cumulative distance measurement The error display is cleared
over the limit! exceeds the display range. when the cumulative distance is deleted or the
measurement range is set to a wider range.
Refer to 6.7, “Setting the Stylus Alarm”.

The buzz function does Volume adjustment is set to minimum. Adjust the volume.
not work properly. Refer to 10.8, “Adjusting the Volume of Indicator
Sounds”.

No. 99MBB122A 16-1

16.2 Measuring Operation
■ Measuring operation

Symptom/Error Possible causes Remedies

display
Over-range error! The result exceeds the measurement range. ࡮Properly connect the detector to the drive unit.
When a red light flashes in upper display, an
over-range error occurs.

࡮When the measurement range has been fixed, set it

to Auto.

Aborting! The [START/STOP] key is pressed during Perform measurement again.

measurement is performed.

No measurement is Self-timer function has been set to ON. Set the self-timer function to OFF.
performed right after the Refer to 10.12, “Setting the Self-timer”.
[START/STOP] key is
pressed.

16-2 No. 99MBB122A

 16. TROUBLESHOOTING

16.3 Calculation Results

■ Calculation results

Symptom/Error Possible causes Remedies

display
Abnormal calibration The result of calibration measurement exceeds Check the value of the precision roughness
value! the possible range of calibration. specimen and the inputted nominal value.
Also, check the calibration measurement setup
conditions.

L 3,000 um Measurement result under a condition of

insufficient number of peaks and valleys.

E 0110 Parameter can not be calculated due to

insufficient number of peaks and valleys.

E 0116 Equivalent line can not be calculated.

E 0117 Roughness motif can not be calculated as more

than 2 local peaks which have required height do
not exist.

E 0118 The first roughness motif exceeds upper limit of

the length A.

E 0121 Parameter can not be calculated as more than 3

motifs do not exist.

Calculation result is Detector is not properly connected to the drive Properly connect the detector to the drive unit.
abnormal. unit.

(Value is large/Value is Connecting cable between drive unit and display Properly connect the drive unit to the display unit.
small/Value remain the unit is not properly connected.
same irrespective of
workpiece.) Calibration measurement was not performed Re-calibrate the SJ-210.
correctly due to improper setup of the SJ-210.

Stylus is worn. Contact your dealer or the nearest Mitutoyo sales

Or other than the above. office.

The GO/NG Judgment The GO/NG Judgment parameter has not been Select desired parameter for setting the GO/NG
result indicator does not set. Judgment.
appear. Refer to 8.3, “Setting the GO/NG Judgment
Function”.

Upper limit/lower limit is set to minimum. Set the upper limit or lower limit.
Refer to 8.3, “Setting the GO/NG Judgment
Function”.

No. 99MBB122A 16-3

16.4 Outputting Measurement Results
■ Outputting measurement results

Symptom/Error Possible causes Remedies

display
SPC data can not be Data output is not set to “SPC”. Set the data output to “SPC”.
outputted. Refer to 10.3.1, “Setting the data output to SPC”.

SPC cable connection problem. Connect the SPC cable properly.

Power to the Digimatic Processor is off. Turn on the Digimatic Processor.

When printout is started, no recording paper is Load the recording paper on the Digimatic Processor.
loaded on the Digimatic Processor.

Printing-out to the external Data output is not set to “Printer”. Set the data output to “Printer”.
printer can not be Refer to 10.3.2, “Setting the data output to a printer”.
performed.
The SJ-210 is not properly connected with the Connect the printer properly with the SJ-210.
printer.

When printout is started, no recording paper is Load the recording paper on the printer.
loaded on the printer.

The printer head unit was raised. Position the printer head unit properly.

The settings of the SJ-210 baud rate and printer Set the printer baud rate to the same numeric value
baud rate are not identical. as that of the SJ-210 baud rate. (Set environment to
“Printer”, and then perform“ Checking
communication”.㧕
Next, turn off the power to the printer and SJ-210 (put
the SJ-210 in the auto-sleep mode), and then turn on
the both power again.

Abnormal temperature was generated on the Turn off the power to the printer once, and then turn it
printer head. on again after a while.

Abnormal power was supplied to the printer. Use the AC adapter supplied with the printer.
If the error still occurs, contact your dealer or the
nearest Mitutoyo sales office.

16-4 No. 99MBB122A

 16. TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom/Error Possible causes Remedies

display
Inaccessible to the Data output is not set to “Saving data”. Set the data output to “Saving data”.
memory card. Refer to 10.3.3, “Setting data output to save data”.

Data output is not set to “Hard copy”. Set the data output to “Hard copy”.
Refer to 10.3.4, “Setting the data output to hard
copy”.

Memory card is not compatible with the SPI mode. Memory card available in the market may not be
(SJ-210 gains access to the memory card in the compatible with the SPI mode, so purchase the
SPI mode.㧕 memory card designated by Mitutoyo.

Card is inserted or removed while SJ-210 is Insert or remove card while the power is turned off.
gaining access.

File for the memory card has been edited by PC. When using memory card for the first time, be sure to
Memory card has not been formatted for the format for the SJ-210.
SJ-210. Do not edit file using PC or other device.

RS-232C Out of PC-to-PC communication has been turned off. Turn on the pc-to-pc communication.
communication. Refer to 10.13, “Setting PC Communication
Conditions”.

Communication baud rate does not match the PC. Set the communication baud rate to the same
numeric value as that of the PC.
Refer to 10.13, “Setting PC Communication
Conditions”.

No. 99MBB122A 16-5

MEMO

16-6 No. 99MBB122A

 17 PRODUCT
SPECIFICATIONS

17.1 Detector
Detection method Differential inductance method

Measurement range 360 μm (-200 μm to +160 μm)

14400 μin (-8000 μm to +6400 μin)

Stylus material Diamond

Tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)/[2 μm (80 μin)]

Measuring force 4 mN (0.4 gf)/[0.75 mN (0.075gf)]

Radius of skid curvature 40 mm (1.575 in)

* [ ] indicates 0.75 mN detector (178-395, 178-387).

17.2 Drive
Detector drive range 21 mm (0.827 in)/[5.6 mm (0.221 in)]

Traversal speed Measurement : 0.25 mm/s, 0.5 mm/s, 0.75 mm/s

(0.01 in/s, 0.02 in/s, 0.03 in/s)

Return : 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)

Detector retraction function Stylus UP/[No]

Bottom configuration: V-shaped trough

* [ ] indicates transverse tracing type.

No. 99MBB122A 17-1

17.3 Display Unit
17.3.1 Compatible roughness standard
JIS B 0601-2001
JIS B 0601-1994
JIS B 0601-1982
ISO 1997
ANSI
VDA
Free (nonstandard)

17.3.2 Condition settings

● Standard, measured profiles and filters

Profile filter is automatically switched according to the roughness standard when it is

switched.

Profile
Roughness standard
P R DF R-Motif

JIS1982 NONE 2CR75 - -

JIS1994 - GAUSS - -

JIS2001 GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS

ISO1997 GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS GAUSS

ANSI PC75
- - -
GAUSS

*1
VDA (NONE )
GAUSS GAUSS -
GAUSS

*1 *1
Free (NONE ) (NONE )
2CR75
2CR75 2CR75
PC75 GAUSS
PC75 PC75
GAUSS
GAUSS GAUSS

*1:When “λs” is set to “NONE”.

17-2 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

17.3.3 Cutoff lengths/sampling lengths, number of sampling lengths, and

sampling interval

*1
Cutoff length (λc) Sampling λs Sampling Number of pieces of Number of
length (ℓ) interval data in a sampling sampling
lengths lengths

0.08 mm 0.08 mm 2.5 μm 0.5 μm

160 1-10
(0.003in) (0.003 in) (100 μin) (19.69 μin)

0.25 mm 0.25 mm 2.5 μm 0.5 μm

500 1-10
(0.01in) (0.01 in) (100 μin) (19.69 μin)

0.8 mm 0.8 mm 2.5 μm 0.5 μm

1600 1-8
(0.03 in) (0.03 in) (100 μin) (19.69 μin)

2.5 mm 2.5 mm 8 μm 1.5 μm

1666 1-5
(0.1 in) (0.1 in) (320μin) (59.1 μin)

*1: These cutoff lengths (λc) are applied when the R profile is specified.

17.3.4 Upper limit of motif lengths/evaluation lengths, number of sampling lengths,

and sampling interval

Upper limit of Evaluation length (L) Cutoff length (λs) Sampling pitch
motif length (A) [mm (in)] [μm (μin)] Δx [μm (μin)]
[mm (in)]

0.02 0.3 ≤ L ≤ 0.64 2.5 0.5

(0.001) (0.0118 ≤ L ≤ 0.0252) (100) (19.685)

0.1 0.65 ≤ L ≤ 3.2 2.5 0.5

(0.004) (0.0256 ≤ L ≤ 0.126) (100) (19.685)

0.5 3.3 ≤ L ≤ 16 8 1.5

(0.02) (0.130 ≤ L ≤ 0.630) (320) (59.055)

No. 99MBB122A 17-3

17.3.5 Parameters and roughness standards/evaluation profiles

Roughness Evaluation Parameter

standard profile

JIS1982 P Rz, Rmax

R Ra

JIS1994 R Ra, Rz, Ry, Pc, Sm, S, mr(c)

JIS2001 P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, PzJIS, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, RzJIS, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1,
A2

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, RzJIS, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1,
A2

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

ISO1997 P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, Pz1max, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1,
A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rz1max, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1,
A2

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rz1max, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1,
A2

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

ANSI R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, RPc, RSm, Rmax, RΔa, RΔq, tp, Htp, Rpm

VDA P Pa, Pq, Pz, Pp, Pv, Pt, Psk, Pku, Pc, PSm, Pmax, PΔq, Pmr, Pmr(c), Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Rp, Rv, Rt, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RSm, Rmax, RΔq, Rmr, Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2

Free P Pa, Pq, Pz, Py, Pp, Pv, Pt, P3z, Psk, Pku, Pc, PPc, PSm, S, HSC, PzJIS, Pppi, PΔa, PΔq, Plr, Pmr, Pmr(c),
Pδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2, Vo, Ppm

R Ra, Rq, Rz, Ry, Rp, Rv, Rt, R3z, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RPc, RSm, S, HSC, RzJIS, Rppi, RΔa, RΔq, Rlr, Rmr,
Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2, Vo, Rpm

DF Ra, Rq, Rz, Ry, Rp, Rv, Rt, R3z, Rsk, Rku, Rc, RPc, RSm, S, HSC, RzJIS, Rppi, RΔa, RΔq, Rlr, Rmr,
Rmr(c), Rδc, Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1, Mr2, A1, A2, Vo, Rpm

R-Motif R, Rx, AR

17-4 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

17.3.6 Measurement range and resolution

Measurement range Resolution

Auto depending on the measurement range

0.0016 μm to 0.0256 μm (0.0630 μin to 1 μin)

360 μm (14400 μin) 0.0256 μm (1 μin)

100 μm (4000 μin) 0.0064 μm (0.25 μin)

25 μm (1000 μin) 0.0016 μm (0.0630 μin)

17.3.7 Traversal length

Conditions Pre-travel/post travel length Remark

When P (Primary profile) Pre-travel length = 0 mm (0 in),

and Motif are selected Post-travel length = 0 mm (0 in)

When the R
Pre-travel length = λc,
(Roughness) and the
Post-travel length = 0mm (0 in)
2CR are selected
Approach length (approx. 0.5 mm/0.02 in) and
When the R
Pre-travel length = λc, λs with pre-travel/post-travel length
(Roughness) and the
Post-travel length = λc
PC75 are selected

When the R
(Roughness), the Pre-travel length = λc/2,
GAUSS and the DF are Post-travel length = λc/2
selected

No. 99MBB122A 17-5

17.4 Power Supply
 AC adapter

Rating 㧦9 V 1.3 A

Supply voltage 㧦100 V

 Built-in battery (Ni-H battery)

Charging hours : 4 hours maximum

Number of measurements per charge : Approx. 1000 (with full charge)

Charging temperature : 5 C to 40 C

17.5 Temperature/Humidity Range

Operation temperature : 5 C to 40 C

Storage temperature : -10 C to 50 C

Operation/Storage humidity : 85% or below (when no condensation detected㧕

17.6 External Dimensions and Mass

71.5 (2.816) Unit: mm (in)
61 (2.402) 10.5
(0.413)
(0.354)

(0.260)

16.4
6.6
9

(0.646)

Mass: 7.8 g

4.8
(0.095)
2.4

(0.189)

Mass: 180 g

Mass: 310 g

[ ] indicates transverse tracing type.

17-6 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

17.7 Optional Accessories

Part No. Name

178-390 Standard detector: Measuring force 4 mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

178-296 Standard detector: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

178-391 SR10 detector: Measuring force 4mN, Stylus tip radius 10 μm (400 μin)

178-392 Small hole detector: Measuring force 4 mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

178-383 Small hole detector: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

178-393 Extra small hole detector: Measuring force 4 mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

178-384 Extra small hole detector: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

*1
178-394 Deep groove detector: Measuring force 4mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

*1
178-385 Deep groove detector: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

178-398 Gear tooth surface detector: Measuring force 4 mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

178-388 Gear tooth surface detector: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

178-230-2 Standard drive unit

178-235 R-Drive unit

178-233-2 S-Drive unit

178-234-2 S-Drive unit set

*2
178-386 Standard detector for S-Drive unit: Measuring force: 4 mN, Stylus tip radius 5 μm (200 μin)

*2
178-387 Standard detector for S-Drive unit: Measuring force 0.75 mN, Stylus tip radius 2 μm (80 μin)

*1
178-033 Setting attachment V type

*1
178-034 Setting attachment slider type

*1
178-035 Setting attachment Inside diameter type

*1
12AAA210 Extension rod 50 mm (19.7 in)

*1
12AAA216 Support feet set

*1
12AAA217 Nosepiece for flat surface

*1
12AAA218 Nosepiece for cylinder

*1
12AAA219 Adapter for vertical application

12AAA220 Adapter for magnetic stand φ9.5 mm (3/8 in dia.)

12AAA221 Adapter for magnetic stand φ8 mm (0.315 in dia.)

12AAA222 Adapter for height gage (mm: 9 x 9 mm)

12AAA233 Adapter for height gage (inch: 1/4 in x 1/2 in)

No. 99MBB122A 17-7

 Part No. Name

12AAJ088 Foot switch

12BAA303 Connection cable for extension 1 m [39.4 in]

178-421A Printer (With connecting cable) for North America

178-421D Printer (With connecting cable) for European countries

12AAA222 Adapter for height gage (mm: 9 mm x 9 mm)

12AAL067 Connection cable (for printer, RS-232C㧕

12AAA876 Printer paper (High endurance paper 5 pieces)

12AAL069 Memory card

*3
12AAL068 Communication cable for USB

- Digimatic data processor DP-1VR

Code No.: 264-504, 264-504-5A, 264-504-5D, 264-504-5E, 264-504-1K, 264-504-5F

936937 Digimatic connecting cable 1 m

965014 Digimatic connecting cable 2 m

264-012-10 Input tool for USB㧦IT-012U

264-013-10 Input tool for USB-Type D㧦IT-013UD

264-014-10 Input tool for USB-Type T 㧦IT-014UT

*1: Option not usable with transverse tracing type

*2: Detector only for transverse tracing type
*3: Used when using this company's software to send data to a PC.

17-8 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
External Dimensions of Detectors
Standard detector 4mN type: 178-390 Transverse tracing detector 4mN type: 178-386
0.75mN type: 178-296 0.75mN type: 178-387
SR10 Detector 4mN type: 178-391

71.5 (2.815) 71.5 (2.815)

61 (2.402) 10.5 61 (2.402) 10.5

(0.413) (0.413)
16.4 16.4

6 (0.236)

(0.646) (0.646)

6 (0.236)
(0.095)

(0.646)
9

(0.646)
9
(0.095)
6.6
(0.260)

6.6
(0.260)
2.4

1.5

2.4
1.5
(0.059) (0.059)
3.5 4.8 3.5 4.8
(0.138) (0.189) (0.138) (0.189)
Small hole detector 4mN type: 178-392 Extra-small detector 4mN type: 178-393
0.75mN type: 178-383 0.75mN type: 178-384

71.2 (2.803) 70.8 (2.787)

60.7 (2.390) 10.5 60.3 (2.374) 10.5

(0.413) (0.413)
16.2 12.8 (0.504)
(0.638)

6.6
(0.260)
6.6
(0.260)

0.8 (0.032)

(0.646)
9
(0.646)
9

3.5 (0.138) 1.2 (0.047) 1.6 (0.063)

4.5 (0.177)

Deep groove detector 4mN type: 178-394 Gear tooth surface detector 4mN type: 178-398
0.75mN type: 178-385 0.75mN type: 178-388

71.5 (2.815) 70.6 (2.780)

61 (2.402) 10.5 60.1 (2.366) 10.5

(0.413) (0.413)
12.6 (0.496)
16.4
(0.646) 
13.6 (0.535)
9 (0.354)

6.6
(0.260)
10
(0.394)

6.6
(0.260)

0.6 (0.024)
(0.646)
9
(0.646)
9

2
(0.079)
1.4 (0.055)
1.5 (0.059)

3.5 (0.138)
4.8 (0.189)

17.8 Consumables

Consumables Part No.

Replacement battery 12AAL272

Display protection sheet (1 sheet) 12BAK820

Display protection sheet (5 sheets) 12AAL066

No. 99MBB122A 17-9

17.9 SPC Output Specifications
■ Connector pin assignment

It can be connected to an instrument which has digimatic I/F depending on a setting.

From the Main Menu screen, select “Set. Environ.”  “Data Output”  ”SPC” before
connecting the instrument.

2 4 6 8 10

Front view

1 3 5 7 9

Pin No. Name Description

1 GND Ground

2 DATA

3 CK Open collector output

4 READY

5 REQUEST Pull up to Vpp (5 V)

6 N.C
to to 㧙
10 N.C

17-10 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

17.10 Contact Connector Specifications

The following figure shows the connection between the SJ-210 and a foot switch.

Foot switch

Foot switch connection

17.11 Connection Specifications with a Personal

Computer
■ Communication conditions
Pin assignment of the connector between the SJ-210 and a personal computer
SJ-210 Personal computer side
RS-232C connector D-SUB connector, 9-pin
1 DCD 1
2 RXD 2
3 TXD 3
4 DTR 4
5 GND 5
6 DSR 6
7 RTS 7
8 CTS 8
9 RI 9
10
11
12

● Communication flow control and transmission/reception processing between the SJ-210 and a personal
computer

Here, communication is performed by a hardware control method using two RTS and CTS
lines.
When the RTS at the personal computer side is turned off during transfer, the transfer is
interrupted. Transmission is resumed after waiting for the RTS at the SJ-210 to be turned
on.
When the data can not be received at the SJ-210 side, the RTS is turned off.

No. 99MBB122A 17-11

17.12 RS-232C Communication Specifications
■ Communication conditions

Setup item Description

Baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400

Parity NON, EVEN, ODD

Data bits 8 bits (fixed)

Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)


● Command form

Communication command form consists of 2 bytes header section, 3 bytes sub-field

section, data section and EM (end mark) section.

Header Sub-field EM
*1
(2 bytes) (3 bytes) Data (1 byte)

** *** ****- CR

EM: End mark

CR: Carriage return code
*1: Data section can be omitted.

● Response form

Following form is returned when processing has normally/abnormally completed.

Header EM
(2 bytes)  Data (1 byte)

OK ****- CR → Successful termination

NG Error code CR → Abnormal termination

17-12 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

■ Command
● Control command

 Control command basic configuration

Header Sub-field EM
*1
(2 bytes) (3 bytes) Data (1 byte)

CT *** ****- CR

*1: Data section can be omitted.

 Control command

Sub-field Data Meaning

STA None Start measurement/Interrupt processing while

measurement in progress

OFF 00 - 02 (2 bytes) Power off/Setting the auto-sleep function

ESP None Detector retraction

RTN None Reposition the detector to the start position.

STA command

[START/STOP] button operation and start/abort measurement are performed.

* Measurement is aborted when this command is issued during measurement.

 Command

Header Sub-field EM

CT STA CR

 Response (normal)

Header EM

OK CR

 Response (abnormal)

Header Sub-field EM Meaning

NG *** CR * * *: Refer to “● Error codes”.

No. 99MBB122A 17-13

 OFF command

Turns the power off or sets the auto-sleep function.

 Command

Header Sub-field Data EM

CT OFF ** CR

00: Turns the power off immediately after accepting the command
(power is off while charging in progress).
01: Prohibits processing the auto-sleep function.
02: Accepts processing the auto-sleep function.

 Response (normal)

Header EM

OK CR

ESP command

Puts the detector in the retraction state.

 Command

Header Sub-field EM

CT ESP CR

 Response (normal)

Header EM

OK CR

RTN Command

Reposition the detector to the original position. This command is used for processes such
as returning from the extended out status.

 Command

Header Sub-field EM

CT RTN CR

 Response (normal)

Header EM

OK CR

17-14 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

● Write command

 Write command basic configuration

Header Sub-field EM
*1
(2 bytes) (3 bytes) Data (1 byte)

WR *** ****- CR

*1: Data section can be omitted.

 Write command

Sub-field Data Meaning

CON ****** Modification of the measurement

conditions or evaluating
conditions

CON command

Command to modify measurement/evaluating conditions

Data section Bytes: number of bytes from the tip of data

Bytes Settings Description

* (standard) 0: JIS1982, 1: JIS1994, 2: JIS2001, 3: ISO1997,

0
4: ANSI, 5: VDA, 6: Free

1 * (Profile) 0: P, 1: R, 2: DF, 3: R-MOTIF

* (Cutoff length λc) 0: 0.08, 1: 0.25, 2: 0.8, 3: 2.5

2
λs is set according to λc.

3 * * (Number of sampling lengths) 00 - 10

* *. * * (Arbitrary evaluation length) 0.10 - 16.00 (When the number of sampling length is 00)
5
Unit [mm]

* (Upper limit of motif length A) 1: 0.02, 2: 0.1, 3: 0.5

10
Upper limit of motif length B is set according to A.

11 㧖    㧔Filters㧕 0:2CR75‫ޔ‬1:PC75‫ޔ‬2:GAUSS‫ޔ‬3:None

 Response (normal)

Header EM

OK CR

 Response (abnormal)

Header Sub-field EM Meaning

NG * * *, * * CR * * * : Refer to “● Error codes”.

* *㧦Bytes with error code

No. 99MBB122A 17-15

● Read command

 Read command basic configuration

Header Sub-field EM
*1
(2 bytes) (3 bytes) Data (1 byte)

RD *** ****- CR

*1: Data section can be omitted.

 Read command

Sub-field Data Meaning

STU 00 - 01 (2 bytes) Reading status information

SJ_ 00 - 01 (2 bytes) Model name information/Reading F/W version

CON None Reading measurement conditions and evaluating conditions

PAR None Customized parameter

RES * *, * *, * * Reading calculation results

(8 bytes)

PSA None Reading detector position information

STU command

Reads status information.

 Command

Header Sub-field Data EM

RD STU ** CR

1) 00: Reading operation status

 Response

Header Data EM

OK *** CR

000: Detector is idling

001: Measurement in progress
002: Detector is being returned
003: Detector is being retracted
004: Detector is retracted
005: Status other than Detector is in the origin/being retracted

17-16 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2) 01: Reading battery status

 Response

Header Data EM

OK *** CR

000: Normal battery voltage (more than 60%)

001: Voltage reduction (below 60%)
002: Abnormal battery (temperature, voltage, no battery)
003: charging

SJ_Command

Reads instrument status information.

 Command

Header Sub-field Data EM

RD SJ_ ** CR

_: Space

1) 00: Reading SJ drive unit type

 Response

Header Data EM

OK *** CR

000: Standard type

001: Transverse tracing type
002: Retracting type

2) 01: Reading SJ F/W version

 Response

Header Data EM

OK ***** CR

No. 99MBB122A 17-17

 CON command

Reads measurement/evaluating conditions. Shares a common format with the write

command.

 Command

Header Sub-field EM

RD CON CR

 Response

Header Data EM

OK ***** CR

Data Bytes: number of bytes from the tip of data

Bytes Settings Description

* (standard) 0: JIS1982, 1: JIS1994, 2: JIS2001, 3: ISO1997, 4: ANSI,

0
5: VDA, 6: Free

1 * (Profile) 0: P, 1: R, 2: DF, 3: R-MOTIF

* (Cutoff length λc) 0: 0.08, 1: 0.25, 2: 0.8, 3: 2.5

2
λs is set according to λc.

3 * * (Number of sampling lengths) 00 - 10

* *. * * (Arbitrary evaluation length) 0.10 - 16.00 (When the number of sampling length is 00)
5
Unit [mm]

* (Upper limit of motif length A) 1: 0.02, 2: 0.1, 3: 0.5

10
Upper limit of motif length B is set according to A.

11 㧖    㧔Filters㧕 0:2CR75‫ޔ‬1:PC75‫ޔ‬2:GAUSS‫ޔ‬3:None

PAR command
Reads number of parameters currently customized.
 Command

Header Sub-field EM

RD PAR CR

 Response

Header Data EM

OK ** CR

* *㧦Number of pieces

17-18 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

RES command

Calculation results read command

 Command

Header Sub-field Data EM

RD RES * *, * *, * * CR

1) 00, aa, bb: Calculated results only

aa: Customized parameter number is shown.
bb: Multiple values with the same parameter, 00-11, or results for each sampling length

 Response

Header Data EM

OK ******* CR
(calculated results 7 digits)

2) 01, aa, bb: Reading GO/NG judgment

aa: Customized parameter number is shown.
bb: Multiple values with the same parameter

 Response

Header Data EM

OK * CR

0: GO/NG judgment OK
1: Upper limit NG
2: Lower limit NG
3: No GO/NG judgment

3) 02, aa, bb: Parameter name, results, reading units

aa: Customized parameter number is shown.
bb: Multiple values with the same parameter, 00-11, or results for each sampling length

 Response

Header Data EM

OK * * * * * * (Parameter name 6 digits), CR

* * * * * * (Calculated results 7 digits),
* * * (Unit 3 digits) right-justified

[Example] Ra 3.123 m CR

No. 99MBB122A 17-19

 PSA command

Reads current detector position information. Unit [Ǵm]

 Command

Header Sub-field EM

RD PSA CR

 Response

Header Data EM

OK * * *. * * * CR

17-20 No. 99MBB122A

 17. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

● Error codes

Error No. Error description Remedies

003 Origin limit cannot be detected within a given period of time. Checking the drive unit

004 Retraction limit cannot be detected within a given period of time. Checking the drive unit

When detected at the origin limit even after an amount of time has Checking the drive unit
005
passed.

When detected at the retraction limit even after an amount of time has Checking the drive unit
006
passed.

Detector over-range Checking the measuring

007
point

011 Request while performing operation

012 Control timeout

013 Buffer overflow

014 Flash memory erase error

015 Flash memory write error

016 Program error

017 System error

018 Measurement start position error Reset the setup

019 Incorrect settings error

030 Illegal command

031 Command format error

032 Command value error

033 Processing command

101 No calculation results

102 Calculated results are out of the range

103 Aborts the measurement due to calculation results over-range

Cannot be calculated due to insufficient number of peaks and valleys

110
㧔Less Peak Valley㧕

111 Rz: Less Peak Valley

112 No sufficient data

113 Range error

114 No profile element

115 Cannot be calculated for the BAC/ADC due to insufficient peaks and

No. 99MBB122A 17-21

 Error No. Error description Remedies
valleys

116 Cannot be calculated due to Rk calculation error

117 R.MOTIF which has less than 2 local peaks of the required height

118 Initial R.MOTIF which exceeds A

W.MOTIF which can not be calculated as the number of motif is less

121
than 3.

130 Other calculation error

150 Memory card initialization error

151 Memory card format error

152 Memory card write error

153 Memory card read error

154 Memory card deletion error

155 A memory card is not inserted

156 No file

157 Not properly formatted or unformatted

158 Insufficient file capacity

159 File access error

160 File version different

161 No measurement data

162 Number of files exceeds

180 Paper out

181 Platen position error

182 Printer anomaly

183 Printer busy

184 Printer access timeout

190 Insufficient battery power

191 Abnormal temperature

200 CPU failure

225 Error other than that

17-22 No. 99MBB122A

 18 REFERENCE
INFORMATION

In this chapter, the surface texture standard and the surface texture parameters are
explained.

18.1 Roughness Standard

18.1.1 Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1982
■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Ra (Use the 2CR filter.)

Ra Range Cut-off value (λc) Evaluation length (ℓn)

Ra ≤ 12.5 µm 0.8 mm 2.4 mm or more

12.5 < Ra ≤ 100.0 µm 2.5 mm 7.5 mm or more

■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Ry

Ry Range Sampling length (ℓ)

Ry ≤ 0.8 µm 0.25 mm

0.8 < Ry ≤ 6.3 µm 0.8 mm

6.3 < Ry ≤ 25.0 µm 2.5 mm

25.0 < Ry ≤ 100.0 µm 8 mm

100.0 < Ry ≤ 400.0 µm 25 mm

■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Rz

Rz range Sampling length (ℓ)

Ry ≤ 0.8 µm 0.25 mm

0.8 < Ry ≤ 6.3 µm 0.8 mm

6.3 < Ry ≤ 25.0 µm 2.5 mm

25.0 < Ry ≤ 100.0 µm 8 mm

100.0 < Ry ≤ 400.0 µm 25 mm

No.99MBB122A 18-1
18.1.2 Evaluating based on JIS B0601-1994
■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Ra

Ra Range Cut-off value (λc) Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

(0.006) < Ra ≤ 0.02 µm 0.08 mm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.02 < Ra ≤ 0.1 µm 0.25 mm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.1 < Ra ≤ 2.0 µm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 4 mm

2.0 < Ra ≤ 10.0 µm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

10.0 < Ra ≤ 80.0 µm 8 mm 8 mm 40 mm

■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Ry

Ry Range Cut-off value (λc) Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.025㧕 㧨 Ry ҇ 0.10 µm 0.08 mm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.10 㧨 Ry ҇ 0.50 µm 0.25 mm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.50 㧨 Ry ҇ 10.0 µm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 4 mm

10.0 㧨 Ry ҇ 50.0 µm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

50.0 㧨 Ry ҇ 200.0 µm 8 mm 8 mm 40 mm

■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Rz

Rz range Cut-off value (λc) Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.025㧕 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.10 µm 0.08 mm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.10 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.50 µm 0.25 mm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.50 㧨 Rz ҇ 10.0 µm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 4 mm

10.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 50.0 µm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

50.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 200.0 µm 8 mm 8 mm 40 mm

■ Standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for Sm

Sm Range Cut-off value (λc) Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

0.013 㧨 Sm ҇ 0.04 µm 0.08 mm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.04 㧨 Sm ҇ 0.13 µm 0.25 mm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.13 㧨 Sm ҇ 0.4 µm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 4 mm

0.4 㧨 Sm ҇ 1.3 µm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

1.3 㧨 Sm ҇ 4.0 µm 8 mm 8 mm 40 mm

18-2 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.1.3 Evaluating based on VDA

Shown below are the standard cut-off values, sampling lengths, and evaluation lengths for
evaluation based on VDA.

NOTE • With the SJ-210, when the VDA standard is selected, the λs filter automatically changes
to (NONE). To enable the λs filter, refer to 7.6, “Modifying Items Related to Cut-off”.
• Be aware that with the VDA standard, there are some differences with JIS B0601-2001
and ISO, such as λs not being set by default.

■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for the measurement of Ra and Rq from non-periodic
roughness profiles

Ra Range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.006㧕 㧨 Ra ҇ 0.02 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.02 㧨 Ra ҇ 0.1 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.1 㧨 Ra ҇ 2.0 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

2.0 㧨 Ra ҇ 10.0 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

10.0 㧨 Ra ҇ 80.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

No.99MBB122A 18-3
■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for measurement of Rz, Rp, and Rt from non-periodic
roughness profiles

Rz range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.025㧕 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.10 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.10 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.50 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.50 㧨 Rz ҇ 10.0 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

10.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 50.0 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

50.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 200.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for the measurement of roughness parameters from
periodic profiles, and for the measurement of RSm from both periodic and non-periodic profiles

RSm Range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

0.013 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.04 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.04 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.13 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.13 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.4 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

0.4 㧨 RSm ҇ 1.3 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

1.3 㧨 RSm ҇ 4.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

18.1.4 Evaluation based on JIS B0601-2001 and ISO

Shown below are the standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for evaluation
based on JIS B0601-2001 and ISO.

■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for the measurement of roughness parameters from
periodic profiles, and for the measurement of RSm from both periodic and non-periodic profiles

RSm Range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

0.013 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.04 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.04 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.13 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.13 㧨 RSm ҇ 0.4 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

0.4 㧨 RSm ҇ 1.3 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

1.3 㧨 RSm ҇ 4.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

18-4 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for the measurement of Ra and Rq from non-periodic
roughness profiles

Ra Range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.006㧕 㧨 Ra ҇ 0.02 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.02 㧨 Ra ҇ 0.1 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.1 㧨 Ra ҇ 2.0 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

2.0 㧨 Ra ҇ 10.0 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

10.0 㧨 Ra ҇ 80.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

■ Standard sampling lengths and evaluation lengths for measurement of Rz, Rp, and Rt from non-periodic
roughness profiles

Rz range Sampling length (ℓ) Evaluation length (ℓn)

㧔0.025㧕 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.10 µm 0.08 mm 0.4 mm

0.10 㧨 Rz ҇ 0.50 µm 0.25 mm 1.25 mm

0.50 㧨 Rz ҇ 10.0 µm 0.8 mm 4 mm

10.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 50.0 µm 2.5 mm 12.5 mm

50.0 㧨 Rz ҇ 200.0 µm 8 mm 40 mm

No.99MBB122A 18-5
18.1.5 Evaluating based on ANSI
Shown below are the standard cut-off values and evaluation lengths for evaluation based
on ANSI.

■ Standard cut-off lengths and evaluation lengths for measuring roughness parameters from periodic profiles


Sm Range Cut-off value (λc) Evaluation length (ℓn)

0.013 (0.0005) < Sm ≤ 0.04 (0.0016) mm (in) 0.08 (0.003) mm (in) 0.4 (0.016) mm (in)

0.04 (0.0016) < Sm ≤ 0.13 (0.005) mm (in) 0.25 (0.01) mm (in) 1.25 (0.05) mm (in)

0.13 (0.005) < Sm ≤ 0.4 (0.016) mm (in) 0.8 (0.03) mm (in) 4 (0.16) mm (in)

0.4 (0.016) < Sm ≤ 1.3 (0.05) mm (in) 2.5 (0.1) mm (in) 12.5 (0.5) mm (in)

To select a cut-off value from the previous table, you must estimate the Sm value from an
unfiltered-profile chart.

■ Standard cut-off lengths and evaluation lengths for measuring roughness parameters from non-periodic
profiles

Ra Range Cut-off value (λc) Evaluation length (ℓn)

Ra ≤ 0.02 (0.8) µm (µin) 0.08 (0.003) mm (in) 0.4 (0.016) mm (in)

0.02 (0.8) < Ra ≤ 0.10 (4) µm (µin) 0.25 (0.01) mm (in) 1.25 (0.05) mm (in)

0.10 (4) < Ra ≤ 2.0 (80) µm (µin) 0.8 (0.03) mm (in) 4 (0.16) mm (in)

2.0 (80) < Ra ≤ 10.0 (400) µm (µin) 2.5 (0.1) mm (in) 12.5 (0.5) mm (in)

18-6 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.2 Evaluation Profiles and Filters


18.2.1 Evaluation profiles
■ Unfiltered profile P

This profile represents the cross-section obtained by intersecting the measuring surface
with a flat plane at a right angle. The profile is a representation of the actual profile
obtained by tracing the surface with a surface-roughness measuring device.

Unfiltered profile P

■ Roughness profile R

This profile is obtained by filtering the unfiltered profile with a long-wavelength cut-off filter
(high-pass filter) to remove long wavelength segments.

Roughness profile R

No.99MBB122A 18-7
■ Motif

Normally, when wave segments are removed from an evaluation profile, the evaluation
profile becomes distorted. The motif method is designed to remove waviness without
causing distortion.
With this method, an evaluation profile is divided into units called “motifs”, which are based
on the wavelength of a component to be removed, and parameters to evaluate the profile
are calculated from each motif.

Measured profile
Ri+1
R2Nmr
Ri
R1

ARNmr
AR1 ARj

Evaluation length

Parameters calculated from the motif analysis

■ DIN4776 profile

For measured surfaces that have deep valleys relative to the irregularity of the surface, the
position of a mean line that is calculated with these deep valleys is inappropriate for
evaluating the true roughness of the surface. However, with this procedure, those negative
effects can be avoided to a certain extent. The procedure is shown below.

1. The initial mean line is obtained with respect to the input data.

Initial mean line

18-8 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

2. Valleys below the mean line are removed.

Removal of valleys

3. The second mean line is obtained with respect to the data obtained in step 2.

Second mean line

4. The original input data is adjusted according to the second mean line.

Adjustment of original data

No.99MBB122A 18-9
18.2.2 Filters
■ Types of filters

The following 3 types of filters are available.

Filter Amplitude characteristics Phase characteristics Amplitude transmission

at the cut-off value

2CR 2CR Without phase correction 75%

PC75 2CR Phase correction 75%

GAUSS Gaussian Phase correction 50%

The characteristics of each filter are explained below.

The attenuation characteristic of each filter is represented by the characteristics of a
high-pass filter.

 2CR
This filter has the same attenuation characteristic as 2 C-R circuits that are connected
in series and that have identical time constants.
The attenuation characteristic is -12 dB/oct, and the amplitude transmission at the
cut-off value is 75%, as shown in figure below.
Amplitude transmission (%)

Amplitude transmission (dB)

Attenuation characteristic of 2CR filter

Attenuation characteristic: H   
1
2
  
1  
 3 c 
 

18-10 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

 GAUSS (Gaussian)
The amplitude characteristic is approximately -11.6 dB/oct, and the amplitude
transmission at the cut-off value is 50%. The attenuation characteristic is shown in the
figure below.

Amplitude transmission (dB)

Amplitude transmission (%)

Attenuation characteristic of the GAUSS (Gaussian) filter

 ac  2
  
Attenuation characteristic: H    1  e   

1
 ln 2  2
where a    ѳ 0.4697
  
Using this filter results in a simple equation:
unfiltered profile = roughness profile + waviness profile
Therefore, the low-pass filter is characterized by:
 ac  2
  
Attenuation characteristic: H    e   

No.99MBB122A 18-11
  About the phase compensation filter
For the regular 2CR filter, output waveforms may be distorted due to phase deviations
that vary with each wavelength.
Shown below are the responses of both a low-pass filter and a high-pass filter to
square wave input.

Input signal (square wave)

0.20 m/cm (50000)

500.00 m/cm (20)

Input wave form

LPF: PC LPF: 2CR
0.20 m/cm (50000)
0.20 m/cm (50000)

500.00 m/cm (20) 500.00 m/cm (20)

Low-pass filter
HPF: PC HPF: 2CR
0.50 m/cm (20000)

0.20 m/cm (50000)

500.00 m/cm (20) 500.00 m/cm (20)

High-pass filter

18-12 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.2.3 Differences in filter characteristics

 The difference of the amplitude transmission factor for the cut-off value of 2CR and
PC
They are both the same filter, but the definition of the cut-off value is the only
difference.
The differences between the two are shown in the figures below.
Amplitude transmission (%)

Different cut-off values with the same filter

Amplitude transmission (%)

Comparison of two filters at the same cut-off value

No.99MBB122A 18-13
18.2.4 Amplitude characteristics of 2CR and GAUSS (Gaussian) filters
 About the amplitude characteristics of the 2CR and GAUSS (Gaussian) filters
The differing amplitude characteristics of the 2CR and GAUSS (Gaussian) filters are
detailed below.

2CR 75
Amplitude transmission (%)

GAUSS

Difference in amplitude characteristics of 2CR and GAUSS filters

■ Filters and relevant standards

The following table lists the correspondence between each filter and its corresponding
standards.

Filters JIS ISO ANSI/ASME VDA (DIN)

2CR B0601-1982 3274㧔1975㧕 B46.1-1985 DIN4762

B0610-1987
B0651-1976

PC 75

GAUSS B0601-1994 11562㧔1996㧕 B46.1-1995 DIN4777

B0651-1996
B0601-2001
B0651-2001

18-14 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.3 Mean Line Compensation

The following table shows the relationships in the SJ-210 between the profiles, the filters,
and the mean line.

Profile Filters Mean line

Unfiltered profile - Arbitrary A line calculated by the least-squares method over the entire
length evaluation length

- Sampling A line calculated by the least-squares method over each

length sampling segment

Roughness 2CR A line calculated by the least-squares method over the entire evaluation length
profile
PC 75 A line calculated by the least-squares method over the entire evaluation length

GAUSS Calculated during filtering.

A line calculated by the

least-squares method
over each sampling segment

A line calculated by the

least-squares method
over the entire evaluation
length

Mean line compensation

No.99MBB122A 18-15
18.4 Traversal Length
In the SJ-210, the traversal length is the sum of the measured length, the approach travel
length, the pre-travel length, and the post-travel length.

NOTE • The pre-travel length and the post-travel length vary depending on the filter used.
When the pre-travel and post-travel settings are set to NO, the traversal length is
reduced by the pre-travel length and the post-travel length.
For details about enabling/disabling the pre-travel and post-travel, refer to 7.9, “Setting
Pre-travel/Post-travel”.

Measuring operation
1 Cycle Reciprocal motion 1 mm/s (0.02 in/s)

Measurement starts from the origin position. When measurement has been completed,
the detector returns to the origin.

■ Traversal length

 When the 2CR filter is selected

Approach
travel Pre-travel Evaluation length ℓ=F 
0.5 mm (0.02 in) ℓ ℓ n

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin

Traversal length (When 2CR filter is selected)

 When GAUSS filter is selected

Approach
travel
Pre-travel Evaluation length Post-travel ℓ=F 
0.5 mm (0.02 in)
ℓ/2 ℓ n ℓ/2

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin

Traversal length (When GAUSS filter is selected)

Data from the pre-travel length and the post-travel length are calculated assuming that
their lengths are ℓ/2.

18-16 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

 When the PC75 filter is selected

Approach travel Pre-travel Evaluation length Post-travel ℓ=F 
0.5 mm (0.02 in) ℓ ℓ n ℓ

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin

Traversal length (When PC75 filter is selected)

Data from the pre-travel length and the post-travel length are calculated assuming that
their lengths are ℓ.

 When measuring with the unfiltered profile (P)

Approach travel Evaluation length
0.5 mm (0.02 in) ℓ n

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin

Traversal length (when measuring with the unfiltered profile (P))

TIP • When measuring the roughness profile with pre-travel and post-travel lengths disabled,
the calculation is performed with the pre-travel and post-travel data folded (nulled).

■ Traversal length when using a detector retracting type drive unit

 When the 2CR75 filter is selected

Escape range
2 mm (0.079 in)

Approach travel Pre-travel Evaluation length

2.5 mm (0.098 in) ℓ ℓ n

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin
Traversal length (When 2CR75 filter is selected)

No.99MBB122A 18-17
  When GAUSS filter is selected
Escape range
2 mm (0.079 in)

Approach travel Pre-travel Evaluation length Post-travel

2.5 mm (0.098 in) ℓ/2 ℓ n ℓ/2

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin
Traversal length (When GAUSS filter is selected)

 When the PC75 filter is selected

Escape range
2 mm (0.079 in)

Approach travel Pre-travel Evaluation length Post-travel

2.5 mm (0.098 in) ℓ ℓ n ℓ

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin
Traversal length (When PC75 filter is selected)

 When measuring with the unfiltered profile (P)

Escape range
2 mm (0.079 in)

Approach travel Evaluation length

2.5 mm (0.098 in) ℓ n

Traversal length

Normal measuring position

Origin
Traversal length (when measuring with the unfiltered profile (P))

TIP • When measuring the roughness profile with pre-travel and post-travel lengths is
disabled, the calculation is performed with the pre-travel and post-travel data folded
(nulled).

18-18 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5 Definitions of the SJ-210 Roughness Parameters

This section explains the definitions (calculation methods) of the roughness parameters
that can be measured with the SJ-210.

Sampling length ℓ

Evaluation length ℓn=ℓn

Sampling length and evaluation length

The following explanations show how the parameters are calculated based on the
sampling length. Parameters that are calculated based on the evaluation length are noted
as such.

18.5.1 Ra (JIS1994, JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Arithmetic mean of

roughness, Ra (JIS1982): Arithmetic mean deviation of roughness
Ra is the arithmetic mean of the absolute values of the evaluation profile deviations (Yi)
from the mean line.

1 n
Ra   Yi
n i 1
 For ANSI, Ra is defined over the entire evaluation length.

18.5.2 Rq (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square of roughness
Rq is the square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of the deviations (Yi) from the
mean line to the evaluation profile.
1
1 n 2
Rq    Yi 2 
 n i 1 
 For ANSI, Rq is defined over the entire evaluation length.

No.99MBB122A 18-19
18.5.3 Rz (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rmax (JIS1982),
Ry (JIS1994, Free): Maximum height
Divide the evaluation profile into segments based on the sampling length. Then, for each
segment, obtain the sum (Zi) of the highest point from the mean line (Pi) and the lowest
point from the mean line (Vi). The average of these sums is Rz, Rmax (for JIS1982), or Ry
(for JIS1994).
Z1  Z 2  Z 3  Z 4  Z 5
Rz  (When n=5, where n is the number of segments)
5

Zi Pi
Z1 P1 Zn Pn

V1 Vi Vn
Sampling length

Evaluation length

Rz maximum height

 Evaluation profile mountains/peaks and valleys/floors

When the evaluation profile contains a mean line, portions of the profile that project
above the mean line are called “mountains”, and portions of the profile that project
below the mean line are called “valleys”. The highest point of each mountain is called
the “peak”, and the deepest point of each valley is called the “floor”.

18-20 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.4 Rp (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free), Rpm (ANSI): Tallest peak
Divide the evaluation profile into segments of based on the sampling length. Then, for
each segment, obtain the distance of the highest point (Rpi) from the mean line. Rp is the
mean of the Rpi values that were obtained from the segments.
Rp1  Rp 2  Rp3  Rp 4  Rp5
Rp  (When n=5, where n is the number of segments)
5
 Rp (ANSI) is defined as the maximum peak height over the evaluation length.

18.5.5 Rv (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum valley depth

Divide the evaluation profile into segments based on the sampling length. Then, for each
segment, obtain the distance of the lowest point (Rvi) from the mean line. Rv is the mean
of the Rvi values that were obtained from the segments.
Rv1  Rv 2  Rv3  Rv 4  Rv5
Rv  (When n=5, where n is the number of segments)
5
 Rv (ANSI) is defined as the maximum floor depth over the evaluation length.

18.5.6 Rt (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Maximum roughness

Rt is the sum of the distance from the mean line to the highest peak and the distance from
the mean line to the deepest floor, for the entire evaluation length.

18.5.7 R3z (Free): Third-level height

Divide the evaluation profile into segments based on the sampling length. Then, for each
segment, obtain the sum (3Zi) of the distance of the 3rd highest peak from the mean line
and the distance of the 3rd deepest floor from the mean line. R3z is the mean of the 3Zi
values obtained from the segments.

 Evaluation profile mountains/peaks and valleys/floors

When the evaluation profile contains a mean line, portions of the profile that project
above the mean line are called “mountains”, and portions of the profile that project
below the mean line are called “valleys”. The highest point of each mountain is called
the “peak”, and the deepest point of each valley is called the “floor”. However, when
the distance of a peak or valley floor from the mean line is less than 10% of the Ry
value, the peak/floor is not regarded as a peak or floor.

No.99MBB122A 18-21
18.5.8 Rsk (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Skewness (degree of asymmetry)
Rsk represents the degree of bias either in the upward or downward direction of an
amplitude distribution curve*1.

1 1 n 3
Rsk    Yi
Rq 3 n i 1

*1: For details about amplitude distribution curves, refer to 18.5.35, “ADC: Amplitude
distribution curve”.

Mean line Measured profile Amplitude Distribution Curve

Sk = 0

Sk < 0
(Abrasion resistance: large)

Sk > 0
(Abrasion resistance: small)

Amplitude distribution curve

 For ANSI, Rsk is defined over the entire evaluation length.

18-22 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.9 Rku (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Kurtosis

Ku represents the degree of concentration around the mean line of an amplitude
distribution curve*1.

1 1 n 4
Rku    Yi
Rq 4 n i 1

*1: For details about amplitude distribution curves, refer to 18.5.35, “ADC: Amplitude
distribution curve”.

Large Ku

Small Ku

Triangular wave Sine wave Square wave

Ku = 1.79 Ku = 1.5 Ku = 1

Amplitude distribution curve

 For ANSI, Ku is defined over the entire evaluation length.

No.99MBB122A 18-23
18.5.10 Rc (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Average height
Portions of the evaluation profile that project upwards are called “profile element
mountains”, and portions of the profile that project downwards are called “profile element
valleys”. A mountain followed by a valley is called a “profile element”. Rc is the arithmetic
mean of the height (Zt) of each profile element.

1 n
Rc   Zti
n i 1
 Depending on the calculation definition in the parameter-conditions settings, the
calculation method differs.

(2) Zt: Zt > Zmin (Example: Zmin = 10% of Rz)

Peak Peak 10% of Rz or more

Evaluation profiles

Zt
Peak Mean line

Valley
Valley
Valley

Xt1 Xt2 Xt3

Rc Average height

Zt > Zmin Mountains and valleys that do not meet the condition “Zmin = Rz for
slice-level height (% or µm)” are not considered profile elements and are excluded
from the calculation.

 When the value for Xs, shown in the previous graph, is less than 1% of the sampling
length, the section of the profile is not considered a profile element and is excluded
from the calculation.

18.5.11 Pc (JIS1994, Free), RPc (ANSI): Peak count

Pc is the reciprocal of the mean width of the mountains and valleys (SM).

Pc = Unit length/Sm (Unit length = 1 cm (0.4 in))

 For ANSI, Pc is defined over the evaluation length.

18-24 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.12 RSm (JIS1994/2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mountain and valley mean
width
Portions of the evaluation profile that project upwards are called “profile element
mountains”, and portions of the profile that project downwards are called “profile element
valleys”. A mountain followed by a valley is called a “profile element”. The value of this
parameter is the arithmetic mean of the width (Xs) of each profile element.

1 n
Rsm   Xsi
n i 1
 Definition of profile element restrictions
As in the following graph, 1 profile element is 1 pair of mountains and valleys. There
are the following 2 types of setting conditions for profile elements.

(1) Zp / Zv: Zp > Zmin, Zv > Zmin (Example: Zmin = 10% of Rz)
Peak Peak
Zp
10% of Rz
Evaluation profiles

Mean line

Zv
Valley
Valley

Xs1 Xs2
Profile element (Zp/Zv)

Zp > Zmin, Zv > Zmin Mountains and valleys that do not meet the condition “Zmin =
Rz for slice-level height (% or µm )” are not considered profile elements and are
excluded from the calculation.

No.99MBB122A 18-25
 (2) Zt: Zt > Zmin (Example: Zmin = 10% of Rz)
Peak Peak 10% of Rz or more

Evaluation profiles

Zt
Peak Mean line

Valley
Valley
Valley

Xt1 Xt2 Xt3

Profile element (Zt)

Zt > Zmin Mountains and valleys that do not meet the condition “Zmin = Rz for
slice-level height (% or µm)” are not considered profile elements and are excluded
from the calculation.

 When the value for Xs, shown in the previous graph, is less than 1% of the sampling
length, the section of the profile is not considered a profile element and is excluded
from the calculation.

 For ANSI, Rsm is defined over the entire evaluation length.

18-26 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.13 S (JIS1994, Free): Mean width of local peak

S is the arithmetic mean of the peak-to-peak distances (Si) of local peaks.
S1 Si Sn

Mean spacing, S, of local peaks of profile

 When an upward convex portion of an evaluation profile has concavities on both sides,
the highest point of the convex portion is called a local peak. However, when the
distance (in the sampling direction) between adjacent convexities is less than 1% of
sampling length, or when the depth of the concavities is less than 10% of Ry, the
convex portion does not qualify as a local peak.
Local peaks

Ry/10 or more Ry/10 or more

1% 1%
or more or more
Local peaks

No.99MBB122A 18-27
18.5.14 HSC (Free): High-spot count
On the evaluation profile, provide a line*1 that is parallel to and located above the mean
line. A peak that projects above the line and is a local peak*2 is called a “peak for high spot
count”. The number of these peaks per centimeter is called the “high spot count (HSC)”.
Peak reference

Base
reference
Count level

High-spot count (HSC)

There are 2 ways of setting the count-level: peak reference and base reference.

 Peak reference peak: Set the count-level based on the depth of the highest peak*3 of
the evaluation profile. The peak depth can be set either as a percentage of Ry or as
an absolute numeric value (m).

 Base reference: Set the count level based on distance from the mean line. The
distance from the mean line can be set either as a percentage of Ry or as an absolute
numeric value (m).

*1: This parallel line to the mean line is called the “count level”.

*2: For an explanation of the local peak, refer to 18.5.13, “S (JIS1994, Free): Mean
width of local peak”.

*3: For an explanation of peaks on the evaluation profile, refer to 18.5.16, “RzJIS
(JIS2001, Free), Rz (JIS1982, 1994): 10-point mean roughness”.

18-28 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.15 Rmax (ANSI, VDA), Rz1max (ISO1997): Maximum height

Rmax is the sum of the height (Yp) of the highest point from the mean line and the depth
(Yv) of the lowest point from the mean line. (Maximum height)

Divide the evaluation profile into segments based on the sampling length. Then, for each
segment, obtain the sum (Zi) of the highest point from the mean line (Pi) and the lowest
point from the mean line (Vi). Rmax (ANSI, VDA) is the maximum value from among Zi (Zn
in the figure below).

R max  Z 4 (In the following figure, the 4th segment, Z4 is the maximum)

Zi Pi
Z1 P1 Zn Pn

V1 Vi Vn
//
SamplingNGPIVJ Rmax
Evaluation length

Maximum height of Rmax

No.99MBB122A 18-29
18.5.16 RzJIS (JIS2001, Free), Rz (JIS1982, 1994): 10-point mean roughness
Rz (JIS) is the sum of the mean height of the 5 highest peaks and the mean depth of 5
deepest valleys, as measured from a line parallel to the mean line.

1 5 1 5
Rz  
5 i 1
Ypi   Yvi
5 i 1

Yp4
Yp2
Yp1 Yp3 Yp5

Yv4 Yv5
Yv1 Yv2 Yv3

Rz 10-point mean roughness

 Evaluation profile mountains/peaks and valleys/floors

When the evaluation profile contains a mean line, portions of the profile that project
above the mean line are called “mountains”, and portions of the profile that project
below the mean line are called “valleys”. The highest point of each mountain is called
the “peak”, and the deepest point of each valley is called the “floor”. However, when
the distance of a peak or floor from the mean line is less than 10% of the Ry value, the
peak/floor is not regarded as a peak or a floor.

18.5.17 Ppi (Free): Peak count

Ppi is the value obtained by calculating the number of peaks that occur in 25.4 mm (1 in) of
Pc.

TIP • The unit for Ppi is displayed as /E (E = 25.4 mm (1 in)).

18.5.18 Δa (ANSI, Free): Slope of the arithmetic mean (angle of the mean slope)
Δa is the arithmetic mean of the absolute values of the local slopes (dz/dx) of the
evaluation profile. The local slope (dz/dx) of the evaluation profile is given by the following
formula:

1 n dzi
a  
n i 1 dx
dzi

1
zi 3  9 zi2  45 zi1  45 zi1  9 zi 2  zi 3 
dx 60x
Zi is the height of the i’th point, and Δx is the distance to the adjacent data point.

 For ANSI, RΔa is defined over the entire evaluation length.

18-30 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.19 RΔq (ISO1997, JIS2001, ANSI, VDA, Free): Mean square slope (angle of the
mean square slope)
Δq is the square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of the local slope (dz/dx) of the
evaluation profile.
2
1 n  dZi 
Rq   
n i 1  dX 

 For ANSI, RΔq is defined over the entire evaluation length.

18.5.20 lr (Free): Expansion length ratio

Ir is the ratio of the expansion length (Lo) and the sampling length (l), and this ratio
describes the degree of depression in the evaluation profile. (Expansion length ratio)
Lo
lr 
l
18.5.21 mr (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free): Material-ratio-length rate
Let a slice line whose mr[c] value falls between 0% and 99% (in 1% increments) be the
reference line, and provide more slice lines at constant increments (in m) below the
reference line. mr[c] values at each slice level are referred to as mr values.

C
DEPTH (m)

Reference line

Reference mr[c] value (%) mrci

mr[c] value (%)

Material-ratio-length rate, mr

There are the following 3 modes for specifying slice lines.

Normal Length (μm)

Rz Percentage of Rz
(%)

Rt Percentage of Rt
(%)

No.99MBB122A 18-31
18.5.22 mr[c] (ISO1997, JIS1994, 2001, VDA, Free), tp (ANSI): Material-ratio length
rate
When you add a parallel line (called a slice line) above the mean line, the mr[c] value for
that slice level is the ratio (%) between the sum of the base lengths of the sections that
protrude above the slice line (the length between where the evaluation profile and the slice
line intersect) and the evaluation length. The slice level is defined as the depth from the
highest peak, and is called a “peak reference”. The slice level is determined by the ratio (0
to 100%) of the depth to the Rt value.

p n
mr (c)   100%  p   bi
ln i 1

Slice level

b1 bn
bi

Evaluation length

Material-ratio length rate, mr[c]

There are 2 ways of setting the slice level: peak reference and base reference.

 Peak reference
The slice level is specified by the depth from the highest point on the evaluation
profile. The depth from this point can be set either as a percentage of Rt or as an
absolute numeric value.

 Base reference
The slice level is specified by the distance from the mean line. The distance from the
mean line can be set either as a percentage of Rt or as an absolute numeric value.
Therefore, when adding the slice line above (+) the mean line, enter a positive
number, and when adding the slice line below (-) the mean line, enter a negative
number.

18-32 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.23 δc (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free), Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference (plateau
ratio)
With the slice level that is set from the mr[c] value as the reference line, δc is the height (or
depth), in m, from the reference line to slice levels obtained from changing the value of
mr[c]. When the slice level used to obtain the height (or depth) is higher than the reference
line, the value of δc is negative. When the slice level used to obtain the height (or depth) is
lower than the reference line, the value of δc is positive.

Reference line

X m

δc slice-level difference

18.5.24 tp (ANSI): Material-ratio length rate

Refer to 18.5.22, “mr[c] (ISO1997, JIS1994, 2001, VDA, Free), tp (ANSI): Material-ratio
length rate”.

18.5.25 Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference (plateau ratio)

Refer to 18.5.23, “δc (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free), Htp (ANSI): Slice-level difference
(plateau ratio)”.

No.99MBB122A 18-33
18.5.26 Rk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Enabled-material-ratio roughness (center
height)
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Rk is the difference along the vertical axis (slice level)
between point C and point D.
I

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr1 Mr2 F
mr[c] (%)
Rk

18-34 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.27 Rpk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Initial abrasion height (peak height)
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point H to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point C, and then set point I to the point were the BAC profile and the slice level at mr =
0 intersect. Next, set point J along mr = 0, so that the area enclosed by line segment CH,
line segment CI, and curve HI and the area of triangle CHJ are the same. Rpk is the
distance between point C and point J. (Initial abrasion height)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr1 Mr2 F
mr[c] (%)

Rpk

No.99MBB122A 18-35
18.5.28 Rvk (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley depth
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point E to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point D, and then set point F to the point were the BAC and the slice level at mr = 100
intersect. Next, set point G along mr = 100, so that the area enclosed by line segment DE,
line segment DF, and curve EF and the area of triangle DEG are the same. Rvk is the
distance between point D and point G. (Valley depth)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E

Rvk Rvk
A2 G

Mr1 Mr2 F
mr[c] (%)

Rvk

18-36 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.29 Mr1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 1 (upper
relative-material-ratio length)
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point H to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point C. Mr1 is the mr value at point H. (Material-ratio length rate 1)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr2 F
Mr1
mr[c] (%)

Mr1

No.99MBB122A 18-37
18.5.30 Mr2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate 2 (lower
relative-material-ratio length)
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point E to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point D. Mr2 is the mr value at point E. (Material-ratio length rate 2)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr1 F
Mr2
mr[c] (%)

Mr2

18-38 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.31 A1 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Peak area

From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point H to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point C, and then set point I to the point were the BAC profile and the slice level at mr =
0 intersect. Next, set point J along mr = 0, so that the area enclosed by line segment CH,
line segment CI, and curve HI and the area of triangle CHJ are the same. A1 is the area of
triangle CHJ. (Peak area)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr1 Mr2 F
mr[c] (%)

Peak area A1

No.99MBB122A 18-39
18.5.32 A2 (JIS2001, ISO1997, VDA, Free): Valley area
From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile) that differ in mr value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set point C and point D to be the points where the obtained line intersects the
lines at mr = 0 and mr = 100. Set point E to the point on the BAC with the same slice level
as point D, and then set point F to the point were the BAC and the slice level at mr = 100
intersect. Next, set point G along mr = 100, so that the area enclosed by line segment DE,
line segment DF, and curve EF and the area of triangle DEG are the same. A2 is the area
of triangle DEG. (Valley area)

Rpk
40%
A1 H
DEPTH (m)

C
Rk A
B D
E
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

Mr1 Mr2 F
mr[c] (%)

Valley area A2

18-40 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.33 Vo (Free): Volume measure

From the lines that are obtained by selecting 2 points (point A and point B) on the BAC
(material-ratio profile)*1 that differ in Rmr[c] value by 40%, obtain the line with the smallest
inclination. Set points C and D to to where the obtained line intersects with the lines for
Rmr[c] = 0 and Rmr[c] = 100, respectively. Rk is the difference along the vertical axis (slice
level) between point C and point D.

Set point H to the point on the BAC with the same slice level as point C, and then set point
I to the point were the BAC profile and the slice level at Rmr[c] = 0 intersect. Next, set
point J along Rmr[c] = 0, so that the area enclosed by line segment CH, line segment CI,
and curve HI and the area of triangle CHJ are the same. Rpk is the distance between point
C and point J. M1 is the Rmr[c] value at point H. A1 is the area of triangle CHJ.

In the same way, set point E to the point on the BAC with the same slice level as point D,
and then set point F to the point were the BAC profile and the slice level at Rmr[c] = 100
intersect. Next, set point G along Rmr[c] = 100, so that the area enclosed by line segment
DE, line segment DF, and curve EF and the area of triangle DEG are the same. Rvk is the
distance between point D and point G. Mr2 is the Rmr[c] value at point E. A2 is the area of
triangle DEG.

Vo is the area, S, of the space bounded on the bottom by the BAC (material-ratio profile)
and on the top by the slice line on the BAC where Rmr[c] is Mr2. The value of this
parameter is converted from the volume (mm3) of the concave portion below the slice level
to a volume per area (cm2) when viewed from the top of a work piece, when the evaluation
profile and slice level are assumed as a plane in a 3-dimensional space.

I

J

Rpk
A1 40%
H
C
DEPTH(µm)

Rk A
B

E
S
Rvk Rvk

A2 G

F
Mr1 Mr2

Volume Vo

*1: The horizontal axis of the BAC represents Rmr[c] values; the vertical axis represents
slice levels (m).

No.99MBB122A 18-41
18.5.34 BAC: Material-ratio profile
BAC is a curve that represents the material ratio of the evaluation profile, where the mr
values are plotted on the abscissa while the slice levels are on the ordinate. The BAC is a
curve where the horizontal axis represents mr values and the vertical axis represents slice
levels.

There are 2 types of BAC depending on how the slice levels were obtained.

 This is based on the BAC reference peak*1 and consists of making mr values obtained
from the slice levels (vertical axis) of the percentage (0 to 100%) against the Rt
value*2 on the horizontal axis, and making the range of the vertical axis 0 to 100%.
DEPTH (%)

mr value

Material-ratio profile (BAC)

*1: For details about the peak/base reference, refer to 18.5.21, “mr (JIS2001, ISO1997,
VDA, Free): Material-ratio length rate”.

*2: For details about Rt, refer to 18.5.6, “Rt (JIS2001, ISO1997, ANSI, VDA, Free):
Maximum roughness”.

18-42 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

18.5.35 ADC: Amplitude distribution curve

Add a slice line to the evaluation curve over the evaluation length. Add a second slice line
that is the unit distance below the first slice line. The amplitude density is the ratio
(expressed as a percentage) of the sum of the horizontal lengths of the sections of the
evaluation profile that fall between the 2 slice levels and the evaluation length.

The amplitude distribution curve (ADC) is plotted by using the depth of the first slice level
as the ordinate value and the amplitude density for that slice level as the abscissa.

Amplitude density (%)

Slice level

Unit distance

Amplitude distribution curve (ADC)

No.99MBB122A 18-43
18.6 Motif-related Parameters
The motif method is a French standard for evaluating surface roughness. This method
was adopted as an ISO standard (ISO12085-1996) in 1996.

Normally, when wave segments are removed from an evaluation profile, the evaluation
profile becomes distorted. This method is designed to remove waviness without causing
distortion.

With this method, an evaluation profile is divided into units called “motifs”, which are based
on the wavelength of a component to be removed, and parameters to evaluate the profile
are calculated from each motif. This section briefly explains how to obtain the motif
parameters.

18.6.1 How to obtain roughness motifs

Use the following procedure to obtain roughness motifs.

1. In order to prevent small bumps from influencing the procedure, obtain the minimum
height (Hmin) used to determine peaks.
Divide the evaluation data into segments that are half the length of the
roughness-motif maximum length, A. For each segment, determine the distance
between the maximum point and the minimum point, and set the minimum height as
5% of the average of these distances.
A/2

hn

h1
Minimum height for determining a peak

1 n
H min  0.05   hi
n i 1
n: Number of measured set lengths

18-44 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

2. Obtain all of the peaks and valleys for the entire evaluation length.
Peaks are defined as the highest point between two valleys whose height is Hmin or
greater. Valleys are the lowest point between two peaks. These peaks and valleys are
used for the entire evaluation length.
P
P
Hmin P
P
P: Peak
V: Valley
V
V V

Peak, valley

The space between two peaks is treated as 1 motif. Motifs appear based on the
following lengths and depths. The horizontal length of the unfiltered profile (motif
length ARi), the vertical distances from the 2 peaks to the floor (motif depth Hj and Hj
+ 1), and the shallower of the 2 motif depths, T. (In the following figure, Hj+1 is T.㧕

Hj
Hj+1

ARi
Motif

3. Compare and combine consecutive roughness motifs.

Combining motifs is subject to the following 4 conditions. Motifs can be combined only
when they meet all of the conditions. Repeat this operation until no more motifs can
be combined.

(Condition 1)
Among adjacent peaks, keep the tallest one. (If the center peak is taller than both
those on the right and left, do not combine motifs.)
Cannot combine motifs Can combine motifs
P2
P1
P1
P2
P3
P3

Combining roughness motifs

No.99MBB122A 18-45
 (Condition 2)
After combining, the length of the new motif cannot exceed the upper length limit.

ARi After combining, ARi value ≤ A

Motif length

(Condition 3)
After combining, the T height of the motif must be greater than or equal to than the T
heights of the motifs (T1 and T2) before combining.
Cannot combine motifs Can combine motifs

T2
T2

T1

T
T1

Motif height

(Condition 4)
At least 1 of the motif depths in the center must be 60% or less of the T height of the
combined motif.

Cannot combine Can combine motifs

Hj+1 Hj+2

Hj+1 Hj+2

T T

Motif depth

18-46 No. 99MBB122A

 18. Reference Information

4. Modify the height (or depth) of tall peaks or deep valleys that stand out.
Calculate the mean depth and the standard deviation from the combined motifs.

H  Hj  1.65Hj

Hj Mean depth for motifs Hj Standard deviation for motif depth

From the above formulas, obtain the maximum value H.

Peaks and valleys in motifs whose motif depth is greater than H are modified so their
height or depth is H.

In the following figures, Zj+1 is modified to Zj+1'.

Modifying a tall peak Modifying a deep valley

Zj+1 Zj+2
Zj

H
Zj+1'
Hj Hj+1
Hj+1 Hj Zj+1'
H

Zj
Zj+1
Zj+2
Replacing the H level

5. Calculate the parameters defined for roughness motifs.

Note 1. Certain parameters are calculated before the processing described in step 4
is performed.

No.99MBB122A 18-47
18.6.2 Roughness motif parameters

Hj+1
Hn+1
H1 Hj

ARj ARn
AR1

Roughness motif parameters

18.6.2.1 R (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean depth

R is the arithmetic mean of the roughness motif depths Hj obtained over the evaluation
length.

1 m
R  Hj
m j !

m: Number of Hj (twice the number of roughness motifs, n: m = 2n)

18.6.2.2 Rx (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif maximum depth

Rx is the maximum depth among motif depths Hj obtained over the evaluation length.

18.6.2.3 AR (JIS2001, ISO1997): Roughness motif mean length

AR is the arithmetic mean of the roughness motif lengths ARi obtained over the evaluation
length.

1 n
AR   ARi
n i !

18-48 No. 99MBB122A

SERVICE NETWORK
Mitutoyo America Corporation Mitutoyo Italiana S.R.L.
3
M Solution Center Illinois Corso Europa No.7, 20020 Lainate, Milano, ITALY
945 Corporate Blvd., Aurora, IL. 60502 U.S.A. TEL: (02) 935781 FAX: (02) 9373290
TEL: (630) 820-9666 FAX: (630) 820-2614 Mitutoyo Schweiz AG
3
M Solution Center Michigan Steinackerstrasse 35, 8902 Urdorf-Zürich, SWITZERLAND
44768 Helm Street, Plymouth, MI 48170, U.S.A. TEL: (44) 7361150 FAX: (44) 7361151
TEL: (734) 459-2810 FAX: (734) 459-0455 Mitutoyo (U.K.) Ltd.
3
M Solution Center California Joule Road, West Point Business Park, Andover,
16925 E. Gale Ave., City of Industry, CA 91745, U.S.A. Hampshire SP10 3UX UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (626) 961-9661 FAX: (626) 333-8019 TEL: (01264) 353123 FAX: (01264) 354883
for Advanced Technical Support Service Mitutoyo Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd.
3
M Solution Center Ohio: Regional Headquarters
TEL: (513) 754-0709 FAX: (513) 754-0718 24 Kallang Avenue, Mitutoyo Building, SINGAPORE 339415
3
M Solution Center Massachusetts: TEL: (65) 6294 2211 FAX: (65) 6299 6666
TEL: (978) 692-8765 FAX: (978) 692-9729 Mitutoyo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
3
M Solution Center North Carolina: Mah Sing Integrated Industrial Park 4, Jalan Utarid U5/14, Section
TEL: (704) 875-8332 FAX: (704) 875-9273 U5, 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan, MALAYSIA
Mitutoyo Canada Inc. TEL: (60) 3-7845 9318 FAX: (60) 3-7845 9346
2121 Meadowvale Blvd., Mississauga, Ont. L5N 5N1, CANADA Mitutoyo Thailand Co.,Ltd.
TEL: (905) 821-1261 to 3 FAX: (905) 821-4968 76/3, Chaengwattana Road, Anusaowaree, Bangkaen,
Mitutoyo Sul Americana Ltda. Bangkok 10220, THAILAND
AV. João Carlos da Silva Borges, 1240, CEP 04726-002 Santo TEL: (66) 2-521 6130 FAX: (66) 2-521 6136
Amaro P.O. Box 4255 São Paulo, BRASIL PT. Mitutoyo Indonesia
TEL: (011) 5643-0000 FAX: (011) 5641-3722 Ruko Mall Bekasi Fajar Blok A6&A7 MM2100 Industrial
Argentina Branch Town
Av. Mitre 891/899 -C.P.(B1603CQI) Vicente Lopez-Pcia. Cikarang Barat Bekasi 17520 Indonesia
Buenos Aires, ARGENTINA TEL:(62) 21-898 0841 FAX:(62) 21-898 0842
TEL: (011) 4730-1433 FAX: (011) 4730-1411 Representative Office
Mitutoyo Mexicana S.A. de C.V. Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh City):
Prol. Ind. Electrica #15 Col. Parq. Ind. Naucalpan C.P.53370, TEL: (84) 8-3517 4561 FAX: (84) 8-3517 4582
Naucalpan, Edo. de Mexico, MEXICO Vietnam (Hanoi):
TEL: 52-55-5312-5612 FAX: 52-55-5312-3380 TEL: (84) 4-768 8963 FAX: (84) 4-768 8960
Mitutoyo Meßgeräte GmbH Philippines:
Borsigstr. 8-10, 41469 Neuss F.R. GERMANY TEL: (63) 2-842 9305/6 FAX: (63) 2-842 9307
TEL: (02137) 102-0 FAX: (02137) 8685 Mitutoyo South Asia Pvt. Ltd.
Mitutoyo Polska Sp.z o.o. C-122, Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-,
ul. Minska, nr54-56, Wroclaw, POLAND New Delhi-110 020, INDIA
TEL: (48) 71-3548350 FAX: (48) 71-3548355 TEL: 91-11-26372090 FAX: 91-11-26372636
Mitutoyo Cesko s.r.o Mitutoyo Taiwan Co.,Ltd.
Dubska 1626, 415 01 Teplice, CZECH REPUBLIC 4F., No.71, Zhouzi St, Neihu District,
TEL: (420) 417 579 866 FAX: (420) 417 579 867 Taipei City114, TAIWAN, R.O.C.
Mitutoyo Hungaria Kft. TEL: (02) 8752-3266 FAX: (02) 8752-3267
Nélochmetvölochlgyi úlocht 97. H-1124 Budapest, Mitutoyo Korea Corporation
XII HUNGARY KOCOM Building 2F, #260-7, Yeom Chang-Dong, Kang
TEL: (00361) 2141447 FAX: (00361) 2141448 Seo-Gu, Seoul, 157-040, KOREA
Mitutoyo Nederland B.V. TEL: (02) 3661-5546 to 7 FAX: (02) 3661-5548
Postbus 550, Landjuweel 35, 3905 PE Veenendaal, Mitutoyo (Beijing) Liaison Office
NETHERLANDS #1011, Beijing Fortune Bldg., No.5 Dong Sanhuan Bei-Lu
TEL: 0318-534911 FAX: 0318-534913 Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100004, P.R. CHINA
Mitutoyo Scandinavia A.B. TEL: 010-65908505 FAX: 010-65908507
Box 712, Släntvägen 6, 194 27 Upplands-Väsby, SWEDEN Mitutoyo Measuring Instruments Co., Ltd.
TEL:(07) 6092135 FAX: (07) 6092410 Shanghai:
Mitutoyo Belgium N.V. Room C 13/F, Nextage Business Center No.1111 Pudong South
Hogenakkerhoekstraat 8, 9150 Kruibeke, BELGIUM Road, Pudong New District, Shanghai, 200120, P.R. CHINA
TEL: 03-254 04 04 FAX: 03-254 04 05 TEL: 021-5836-0718 FAX: 021-5836-0717
Mitutoyo France S.A.R.L. Suzhou:
123, rue de la Belle Etoile, B.P. 50267-Z.I. Paris Nord II 95957 46, Bai Yu Street, Suzhou, 215021, P.R. CHINA
Roissy CDG Cedex, FRANCE TEL: 0512-62522660 FAX: 0512-62522580
TEL: (01) 49 38 35 00 FAX: (01) 49 38 35 35 Tianjin:
Mitutoyo France S.A.R.L., Agence de Lyon No.16 Heiniucheng -Road, Hexi - District,
TEL: (04) 78 26 98 07 FAX: (04) 72 37 16 23 Tianjin, 300210, P.R. CHINA
Mitutoyo France S.A.R.L., Agence de Strasbourg TEL: 022-8558-1221 FAX: 022-8558-1234
TEL: (03) 88 67 85 77 FAX: (03) 88 67 85 79
Mitutoyo Corporation
20-1, Sakado 1-Chome, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi,
Kanagawa 213-8533, Japan
Tel: +81 (0)44 813-8230 Fax: +81 (0)44
813-8231
Home page: http://www.mitutoyo.co.jp/global.html